APTARE Storage Console UserGuide

APTARE StorageConsole
Report User’s Guide

7.2
Copyrights and Trademarks
Copyright © 2007-2009 APTARE, Inc., All rights reserved.
The information contained in this book is subject to change without notice. Reproduction,
adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under
the copyright laws.
APTARE® and StorageConsole® are registered trademarks of APTARE, Inc. and/or its affiliates
in the U.S. and certain other countries.
HP Data Protector is a trademark of HP.
Hitachi is a trademark of Hitachi Data Systems.
Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Microsoft, Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh, Mac, Apple, Safari, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
EMC NetWorker is a registered trademark of EMC Corporation.
NetBackup and Backup Exec are registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation.
NetApp, Data ONTAP, SnapVault, SnapMirror, and FlexVol are registered trademarks of
NetApp, Inc.
VMware is a registered trademark of VMware, Inc.
Other company and product names mentioned herein can be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies and should be treated as such.
Publication Change Record

The following table records all revisions to this publication. This first entry is always the
publication’s initial release. Each entry indicates the date of the release and the number of the
system release to which the revision corresponds.
Doc Revision ID Date System Release
MK-97APT025-01 February 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5
March 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.19
April 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.5.22, v6.5.23,
May 2008 v6.5.24 and v6.5.25
June 2008
July 2008
September 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6
December 2008 APTARE StorageConsole, v6.6 Service Pack 1
April 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.0
September 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.1
Copyrights and Trademarks 3

Doc Revision ID Date System Release
July 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.0.04 P2
August 2009 APTARE StorageConsole, v7.2
4 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Contents
Preface i
About This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Who Should Use This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Contacting APTARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Chapter 1
Getting Acquainted With Reports 1
About the Portal User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Navigation Pane (Report Navigator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Content Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Toolbar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Available Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Tables and Charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Out-of-the-Box Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Logging In/Off the Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Managing My Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Changing Your Login Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Chapter 2
Generating and Maintaining Reports 13
About the Report Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Menu Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Report Template and Report Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Units of Measure in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
About Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selecting Report Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Listing Server Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Searching for Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Searching for Servers in Report Designers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Report Designer Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Backup Manager Primary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Backup Manager Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Capacity Manager Primary Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Capacity Manager Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Filter Report Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Filter Report Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Sorting Columns in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Setting Refresh Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Modifying Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Saving Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Deleting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Searching for a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Chapter 3
Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting 39
Exporting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Scheduling Exported Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Emailing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Scheduling Emailed Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Contents 5
Scheduled Reports Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Deleting Scheduled Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Sharing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Technical Community Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Adding Notes to Backup Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 4
Organizing Reports 55
Task Overview: Organizing Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Creating Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Adding Reports to Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Dashboard Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Deleting Reports from Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Creating a Custom Menu Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Changing Your Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Chapter 5
Custom Reports 61
About Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Using Report Template Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Creating a Custom Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configure Report Designer Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Specify the SQL Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Sample Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Using Functions in Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Format the Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit a Custom Report Template. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Exporting/Importing Report Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Export a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Import a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 6
System Administration Reports 99
Collection Message Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Collection Message Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Data Collection Message Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Database Error Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Report Activity Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Report Activity Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Monitoring Data Collection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Scheduled Reports Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Top Running Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Top Running Report Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Version History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Data Collector Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Chapter 7
Backup Manager Management Reports 111
Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Job Status Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Job Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Job Summary - Heterogeneous Backup Products . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Backup Exec Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

HP Data Protector Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
NetBackup Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
NetWorker Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
TSM Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Job Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adding a Note to a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Job Volume Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Job Duration Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Error Log Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Consecutive Errors By Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Largest Backup Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Monthly Backup Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Job Summary By Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Running and Queued Job Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
NetBackup Running and Queued Jobs Summary . . . . . . . . . . . 136
NetWorker Running Save Sets Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
HP Data Protector Session Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
HP Data Protector Session Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 8
Backup Administration Reports 141
Operations Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Command Center Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Data Protection Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Message of the Day Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Server Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Server Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Mission Control Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tailoring the Report Output by Backup Product . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Client Protection Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
TSM Storage Pools Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
TSM Process Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Client Job Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Job Throughput Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Job Activity Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chapter 9
Media Management Reports 163
Using Media Management Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Current Media Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tape Media Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Tape Media Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
HP Data Protector Tape Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NetBackup Tape Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NetWorker Tape Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
TSM Tape Media Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Chapter 10
Backup SLA Reports 171
Available SLA Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Backup Start Time SLA Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance . . . . . . . 174
Backup Status SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Changing the Success Percentage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance . . . . . . . . 176
Backup Duration SLA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance . . . . . . . . 178
Contents 7
Chapter 11
Backup Storage Utilization Reports 179
Using Storage Utilization Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Disk Usage and Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Storage Unit Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Storage Unit Event Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Drive Utilization and Performance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Drive Performance Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
NetBackup Drive Performance Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Drive Performance Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
TSM Database Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
TSM Recovery Log Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Storage Unit Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Real Time Library and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Chapter 12
Backup Manager Forecasting Reports 199
Forecasting Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Media Forecasting Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Media Availability Forecast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Media Consumption Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Media Usage Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Scratch Pool Forecast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
NetBackup Library Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Chapter 13
Backup Billing and Usage Reports 211
Available Billing and Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Determining Media Chargebacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Determining Backup Chargebacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Billing and Chargeback Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Server Consumption Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Chapter 14
Backup Policies Reports 219
NetBackup Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Backup Policy Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
TSM Policy Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Policy Domain Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
NetWorker Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Group Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Client Instance Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
HP Data Protector Backup Specification Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Chapter 15
Capacity Manager Reports 231
Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process . . . . . . . . . 232
Overview of Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Why Capacity Manager? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Capacity Manager Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Capacity Manager Quick-Start List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Array Capacity and Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
List Array Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Host Capacity & Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Host Utilization Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Array Group Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group Specifics . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Host HBA Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Array Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Array Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Host Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Applications At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Over-Provisioned Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard . . . . . . . 267
Available/Reclaimable Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Array Utilization Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Array Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Allocated but Unused LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Unallocated LUNs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Suspected De-provisioned Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Unused Disks/Volume Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Capacity Chargeback and Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Capacity Chargeback By Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Chargeback Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Chargeback Policy Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Policy Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
LUNs At Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Over-Provisioned LUNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Hosts at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Over-Provisioned Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Chapter 16
NetApp Capacity Reports 289
Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
NetApp Storage System Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
NetApp LUN Utilization Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
NetApp Aggregate Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
NetApp Aggregate Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
NetApp Plex Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
NetApp Volume Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
NetApp Volume Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
NetApp NFS Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
NetApp CIFS Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
QTree Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
NetApp Snapshot Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Array iSCSI Port Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
NetApp Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
NetApp Aggregates at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
NetApp Volumes at Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Thin Provisioning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chapter 17
IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports 317
Overview of IBM Array Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Pre-Requisites for IBM Array Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View) . . . . . . . . . 320
Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Subsystem Array View) . . . . . . . . . 320
Contents 9
IBM Array Site Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
IBM Array Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
IBM Array Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
IBM Rank Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
IBM Extent Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
IBM Disk Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Chapter 18
HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports 337
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Hitachi Disk Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View) . . . . . . . . . 343
Chapter 19
Virtualization Manager Reports 347
Virtualization Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Overview of Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Understanding the Datastore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and Monitoring . . . . . . . 351
VM Server Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
VM Server Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
VM Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
VM Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Logical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
VM Files Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Datastore Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Datastore Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Datastore Usage Breakdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Physical Disk Utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Physical Disk Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
VM Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Focusing on Specific I/O Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
VM Performance Over Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Datastore Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Physical Disk Performance Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Physical Disk Performance Over Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
VM Size Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Datastore Capacity Forecast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Index 385

Preface
Chapter0
Thank you for purchasing APTARE® StorageConsole.
About This Book

This book describes how to generate, distribute, organize, and share reports. This book
assumes that you have read the APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for
Report Users.
Who Should Use This Book

APTARE recognizes that the Portal is useful to a number of different users:
• Storage Administrators
• Storage Managers/Directors
• Legal Compliance Professionals
• Capacity Planners
• Billing and Chargeback Professionals
Related Documentation
APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5
APTARE, Inc. welcomes your feedback, which we regularly incorporate into the
documentation.
The following documents contain additional information relevant to installing,
maintaining, and administering this system.
• APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes - This document outlines what’s new in the release
and what known issues were fixed in the release. and is available online at www.aptare.com
• APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide - This document provides a list
of the supported products and hardware requirements. This book is available online at
www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Report Users - This book provides a
basic introduction to the Portal and describes the basic workflow to begin using the reports.
This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal
Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.
• APTARE StorageConsole Getting Started Guide for Administrators - This book describes
the basic workflow involved in setting up the backup reporting environment. This book is
available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software
CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.
About This Book i

• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Symantec Backup Exec -
This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data
Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal
Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for HP Data Protector - This
book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data
Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for EMC NetWorker - This
Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Agent Installation Guide for NetBackup - This book provides
step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure the Data Collector. Available
online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for IBM Tivoli Storage
Manager - This book provides step-by-step instructions about how to install and configure
the Data Collector. Available online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE
StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Data Collector Installation Guide for Capacity Manager - This
Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Upgrade Guide - This book provides step-by-step instructions
about how to upgrade to a major release of the software. Available online at www.aptare.com
and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• Hitachi Storage Viewer Portal Installation Guide - This book provides step-by-step
instructions about how to install the Portal Server and the Reporting Database. This book is
CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide - This book describes how to generate,
distribute, organize, and share reports. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and
on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also, all the topics in this guide are
available in the online help.
• APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide - This book provides
information about how to manage the Portal to support report generation and report access.
These tasks are usually performed through the Portal user interface. This book is available
online at www.aptare.com and on the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD. Also,
all the topics in this guide are available in the online help.
• APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide - This book provides information
to help you maintain and monitor the entire platform to ensure its availability. This book
covers mostly back-end administration—administration tasks usually performed on the
Portal Server and Database Server. This book is available online at www.aptare.com and on
the APTARE StorageConsole Portal Software CD.
• APTARE StorageConsole Database Programmer’s Guide - This book provides information
about how to query the Reporting Database using the provided database views. This book is
CD.
ii Administrator’s Guide
Typographical Conventions
This document uses different typefaces to indicate different kinds of information. The
following table explains these typographical conventions.
Font Meaning
Typewriter Indicates error messages, file name, or screen output.
Bold In a command line, indicates information to be entered
exactly as shown.
Italics Indicates a variable for which you should substitute an
appropriate value.
Typographical Conventions iii

Contacting APTARE
Technical Support: Sales:

Customer Care Group • sales@aptare.com or
• support@aptare.com or • 1 866-9-APTARE, Option
#2
• 1-408-871-9848
• 1-866-9-APTARE, Option #1, 6:30am - 5:30pm
Pacific Time
iv Administrator’s Guide
1
Getting Acquainted With Reports

Chapter0
This chapter covers the following topics:

• About the Portal User Interface
• Available Reports
• Logging In/Off the Portal
• Managing My Profile
• Changing Your Login Password
About the Portal User Interface

The reporting database is accessed via a centralized web portal interface, which follows
web-based standards to offer common navigation features. Using your favorite browser,
you can securely view backup reporting and management details. Interactive
dashboards offer drill-down access to file-level specifics.
Navigation Pane (Report Navigator)

The Navigation pane, at the left of the Portal window, provides access to dashboards
and reports. Categories in this list can be expanded to reveal additional reports and then
collapsed to reduce screen clutter. Click on the arrow point to the left of the entries to
expand/collapse the list.
.
The Report Finder search box offers an additional method for selecting a specific
report or for displaying a list of similar reports. The Finder supports a word or partial
word search. For example, to view a list of all of your log reports, type log in the
About the Portal User Interface 1

Report Finder search box. Likewise, to list reports related to SLAs, type SLA in the
Report Finder box
Tip: To refresh the Navigation pane, go to the Report Finder box and click Clear.
Content Pane
The Content pane is the main display area to the right of the Navigation pane. The
Content pane shows the details of elements that you select in the Navigation pane.
When you select multiple reports or views from the Navigation pane, the Content pane
launches tabbed displays to enable easy, concurrent access to several reports. Use
typical browser actions to remove a tabbed display or to switch between tabbed views.

Toolbar Options
Along the top border of the Portal window, a toolbar categorizes your options.
:
The items that you see depend on your permissions—User or Administrator privileges,
as shown in Table 1.1. For details about these features, see:
• APTARE StorageConsole Application Administrator’s Guide
• APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide
Tool Item User Admin Documented in:

Close All Tabs x x self-explanatory
New Dashboard x x Report User’s Guide
Import Template x x Report User’s Guide
Template Designer x x Report User’s Guide
Report
My Scheduled Reports x x Report User’s Guide
My Shared Reports x x Report User’s Guide
Go To My Homepage x x Report User’s Guide
Set This Report As My Homepage x x Report User’s Guide
Search x x Report User’s Guide
Create Restore Job x x Report User’s Guide
Manage Restore Jobs x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Tools
Data Collection Status x Application Administrator’s
Guide
My Profile x x Report User’s Guide
Change My Password x x Report User’s Guide
Table 1.1 Portal Toolbar Options
About the Portal User Interface 3

Tool Item User Admin Documented in:
Users and Privileges x Application Administrator’s
Guide
User Groups x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Server & Server Group Admin x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Domains x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Attributes x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Schedules x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Admin Backup Windows x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Threshold Policies x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Discovery Policies x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Data Collector Policies x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Billing and Usage Policies x x Report User’s Guide
Capacity Chargeback Policies x x Report User’s Guide
SLA Group Policies x x Application Administrator’s
Guide
Help Topics x x self-explanatory
Forum x Links to the community
Help forum web site
About x x self-explanatory
Logout End your session. x x Report User’s Guide
Table 1.1 Portal Toolbar Options

Available Reports
The Portal includes a number of pre-defined reports, which you can tailor and save as
report instances to meet your specific reporting requirements. The best way to become
acquainted with available reports is to expand the list in the Navigation pane, to the left
of the Portal’s browser window.
Reports are designed to enable views of high-level information, with drilldown access
to details in sub-reports. This hierarchy is simply organized as:
• Tier 1 - High-level reports present data in the form of tables and charts.
• Tier 2 - Summary level data is presented in tabular form. The rows in the table are the details
that were aggregated in the high-level chart.
• Tier 3 - Detail reports display specifics related to the drilldown selection in a Tier 2 report.
Tables and Charts

• Tables display data in rows and columns, with highlighted links that enable drilldown access
to additional details. When you click a link, a new report is generated in a new pane with a
tab displayed at the top of the Content pane. Tabular data can be sorted in ascending or
descending order by clicking the column headers. Some tables use color to highlight
potential problems. For example, the Host Utilization Detail report highlights values when
they fall below the availability threshold.
• Charts utilize colored bar graphs and pie charts to enable at-a-glance analysis. Multi-colored
bars can be deciphered with a few simple moves of your mouse. Glide your cursor over each
colored section of a bar or pie to view a text description of what that portion of the bar/pie
represents. For example, in the Job Status Summary report, a single bar will reflect the
number of event failures, the number of warnings, and the number of successful backups. In
addition, some charts display a trend line graph with data points represented as percentages.
If you move your cursor over a particular data point arrow, the performance percentage value
will be displayed.
Out-of-the-Box Reports
The following out-of-the-box reports are available from the menu at the left of the
browser window.
System Status and Backup Manager Reports

System Status Reports
Collection Message Summary Lists issues that occurred during the data collection process for Legato NetWorker,
HP Data Protector, and Capacity Manager Host Resources
Database Error Summary Lists database errors that may need to be brought to the attention of Customer
Support; however, user‐resolvable errors may also be included in the summary.
Report Activity Summary Bar chart representing run‐time of reports, with a drilldown to details
Scheduled Reports Summary Table of reports that are scheduled as alerts, exports, or emails
Top Running Reports Lists the reports that have been running for long periods of time or that have run an
excessive number of times. The average execution time includes not only the
database query, but also the time associated with building the report on the Portal
server.
Version History Historical list of software upgrade versions
Data Collector Status Summary List of data collectors, which indicates if there have been collection gaps or issues
Available Reports 5
Management Reports
Job Status Summary Displays a bar chart that aggregates jobs that succeeded, failed, or produced
warning messages. Provides drill‐down access to the Job Summary report, where
you’ll find specific status messages and scheduling information.
Job Summary Tabular list of backup jobs, with drill‐downs to details
Job Volume Summary Bar chart that represents “how much” data has been backed up each day; use to
ascertain problematic time periods, consumption trends, and scheduling peaks; Drill
down to the Job Summary report.
Job Duration Bar chart of job duration for backup and restore jobs
Error Log Summary Tabular report that lists backup failure details
Consecutive Errors By Client Tabular report of consecutive errors and consecutive days
Largest Backup Volume Pie chart representing a snapshot of the largest server backup consumers
Monthly Backup Summary Table of the monthly backup summary
Job Summary by Server Table of the number of jobs and their status: running, queued, warnings, errors
Running & Queued Job Summary Displays any job that was running or queued at the time the management servers
were polled.
HPD Session Summary HP Data Protector session summary
Administration Reports
Data Protection Dashboard Dashboard view of Message of the Day, Job Status Summary, Mission Control report,
and Monthly Backup Summary
Command Center Dashboard Dashboard view of Real Time Job Summary, Real Time Library and Drive Status, Real
Time Storage Unit Utilization, and Running and Queued Jobs Summary
Operations Dashboard Dashboard view of Job Status Summary, Current Media Summary, Largest Backup
Volume, and Storage Unit Status
Mission Control Snapshot of backup/restore event status, with easily identifiable indicators of
success/failure and drilldowns to details
TSM Storage Pools Dashboard Dashboard of TSM Storage Pool details
Client Protection Summary Tabular report that identifies exposure and threats to an enterprise data protection
environment
Client Job Histogram Display either Job Throughput or Job Activity
Media Management Reports
Tape Media Summary Table of Tape Media usage
Current Media Summary Pie charts illustrating current media utilization
SLA Reports
Backup Status SLA Bar chart representing the success/failure performance
Backup Start Time SLA Bar chart displaying the total number of backups that began within a specific time
range of their scheduled start time
Backup Duration SLA Bar chart representing backup duration SLA
Storage Utilization Reports
Disk Usage & Performance Bar and pie charts representing volume & throughput & consumption
Tape Library & Drive Utilization Bar chart of library utilization
Drive Utilization & Performance Bar charts of drive activity
Drive Performance Summary Drive performance high‐level details, with drilldowns
TSM Database Utilization Usage and capacity trending of TSM database—bar chart
Storage Unit Summary Library and file system details for NetBackup storage units
Storage Unit Detail Table of storage unit event details
Real Time Library & Drive Status High‐level detail of tape libraries in your storage environment
Forecasting & Capacity Planning
Media Forecasting Dashboard Bar charts, pie charts, and tables representing forecasted consumption
Media Availability Forecast Bar chart forecasting consumption vs. available media
Media Consumption Forecast Bar chart representing historical tape usage with projected need
Tape Drive Usage & Forecast Bar chart shows maximum/average used, with maximum/average forecasted
Scratch Pool Forecast Bar chart of available and forecasted scratch pool storage
Library Capacity Forecast Bar chart of NetBackup tape library usage and forecast

Billing & Usage Reports
Billing & Chargeback Summary Table of usage and billing details by server
Server Consumption Summary Table of consumption details by server
Backup Policies
NetBackup Policies Table listing NetBackup policies, with drilldowns to details
TSM Policy Domains Table listing TSM policy domains, with drilldowns to details
NetWorker Groups Table listing NetWorker groups, with drilldowns to details
HPD Backup Specification Table listing HP Data Protector specifications, with drilldowns to details
Capacity Manager Reports

Capacity Manager Reports Description
Storage Capacity & Utilization
Array Capacity & Utilization Overview of storage array capacity & utilization. Use this report to identify under-utilized
storage arrays
Host Capacity & Utilization Overview of host utilization. Drill down to details in the Host Utilization Detail report.
LUN Utilization Summary If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their size or
reassign them altogether. View all the LUN mapping details, such as mount points and file
systems.
Array Port Utilization Lists the physical/logical port connections between the host’s HBA and the storage array. Use
this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts/arrays are taken
out of service. This report provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across
array ports.
Host HBA Summary Lists HBA details for hosts
NetApp Aggregate Summary Summary of how physical aggregates are configured to manage disks, RAID groups, and
plexes.
NetApp Volume Summary Summary of the logical volume with links to the associated QTree, LUN, and Snapshot details.
NetApp NFS Summary Lists the volumes that are exported via NFS.
NetApp CIFS Summary Lists the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts via CIFS shares.
NetApp QTree Summary Summary of the quota management configurations
NetApp Snapshot Summary Lists snapshot details for the report’s time interval.
NetApp Disk Summary Lists the disks within a storage system
IBM Array Site Summary Tabular list of Array Site configurations and capacity
IBM Array Summary Tabular list of IBM Array configurations and capacity
IBM Rank Summary Tabular list of IBM Array Ranks, with configuration and capacity details
IBM Extent Pool Summary Tabular list of IBM Extent Pools, with configuration and capacity details
IBM Disk Summary Tabular list of disks within IBM Storage Arrays, with configuration and capacity details
Hitachi DP Pool Summary Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary, with capacity and threshold details
Hitachi DP Pool Utilization Bar chart of dynamic provisioning consumption
Hitachi Disk Summary Disk device details
Storage Capacity & Forecast
Array Capacity Forecast Project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by the following criteria:
²Historical date range
²Forecast horizon (date range)
²Storage Array Group
²Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity
Host Capacity Forecast At-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage—from the host’s perspective. You can
narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.
Available or Reclaimable Storage
Array Utilization Dashboard Bar charts and tables provide capacity and usage details, enabling a quick glance of potential
reclaimable storage
Array Utilization Summary Displays a summary listing of each array’s capacity and usage.
Available Reports 7
Allocated but Unused LUNs All the necessary LUN configuration steps have been completed to make this storage
available, but it still remains unused. The LUNs have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or
volume groups on the hosts associated with the LUN storage paths.
Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs These LUNs have storage paths, but have no knowledge of the disks, partitions, or volume
groups on the hosts associated with those storage paths.
Unallocated LUNs Lists LUNs that are not allocated to any hosts. These LUNs have no storage paths.
Suspected De-provisioned Hosts Storage often is allocated from a storage array and provisioned to a host, but when that host is
re-assigned or de-provisioned, the storage remains unused. This report list hosts that are
candidates for re-assignment.
Unused Partitions/Logical This report lists logical volumes created from disks or volume groups, but no file systems have
Volumes been create on these logical volumes.
Unused Disks/Volume Groups This report provides insight into wasted space on hosts. It displays the total volume group and
disk capacity, along with used and available capacity.
Application Capacity & Utilization
Applications At Risk Identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage space.
Over-Provisioned Applications Identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned storage—resulting in wasted
storage.
Application Storage Dashboard This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. The table
has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array
Storage. Expand the application row to view details.
Chargeback and Billing
Chargeback By Host View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by host.
Chargeback Policy Capacity View chargeback policy capacity for RAID and LUNs
Capacity At Risk
LUNs At Risk LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected usage.
Over-Provisioned LUNs Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the space. Since this report
shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the threshold.
Hosts At Risk This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link to drill
down to particulars. Select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical.
Over-Provisioned Hosts Determine which hosts are over-provisioned. Reclaim the space before acquiring additional
storage.
NetApp Aggregates at Risk For thin provisioning, this report lists host usage that is about to exceed the storage that was
promised.
NetApp Volumes at Risk Lists thin-provisioned volumes that may be at risk of over-commitment
Virtualization Manager Reports

Virtualization Manager Reports Description
Administration
VM Server Summary List the VM Servers, with CPU, Memory, Disk, and Datastore Usage. Drill down to specific VM
details, such as VM Server Details and Physical Disk Utilization.
VM Summary View the list of Virtual Machines, including capacity usage and VM status. Drill down to view
details, including Datastore and Logical Disk Utilization.
VM Files Summary View specific files associated with a VM. This report is key to identifying reclaimable storage.
Datastore Utilization Identify what storage is in use and where it is located. Link to details to view Extents and the
corresponding Physical Disk details. Also, link to the array from which the storage has been
provisioned.
Datastore Usage Breakdown View pie charts that represent the usage by file type, such as VMDK, VM not in Inventory, non-
VM files, and free space.
Physical Disk Utilization List physical disks associated with VMs, along with Array and LUN mappings.
Performance Reports
VM Performance Summary Report on CPU and Memory usage, enabling insight into storage access bottlenecks.
VM Performance over Time Charts of CPU, Memory, Disk I/O Usage, and Disk Write Latency over time.
Datastore Performance Summary Tabular list of datastores with disk I/O statistics, including read/write latency

Physical Disk Performance Tabular list of physical disks with I/O statistics, including read/write latency
Summary
Physical Disk Performance over Charts of physical disk performance over time, with drilldowns to VM details
Time
Forecast & Planning
VM Size Forecast View graphs that project growth, based on historical usage
Datastore Capacity Forecast View average capacity and forecasted usage graphs for each Datastore.
Replication Manager Reports
Replication Manager Reports Description

SnapMirror Reports
SnapMirror Summary View a listing of the status of SnapMirror transactions. This report lists source-destination
pairs, along with the most frequently used relevant metrics.
SnapMirror Schedule List the SnapMirror Schedules, showing error/success status.
SnapMirror Status Display a bar chart for an at-a-glance view of the success/failure of SnapMirrors, based on the
last sampling of data. Drill down to the SnapMirror Summary.
SnapMirror Data Transfer Display a bar chart representing the amount of data transferred from NetApp source to
destination systems.
SnapMirror Volumes/QTrees at Track storage being consumed by SnapMirror Transactions and prevent usage from
Risk exceeding capacity.
SnapMirror Relationship Summary List the source-destination status, with base snapshots.
Data Protection Dashboard List SnapMirror source paths with colored success/failure indicators that drilldown to details.
SnapVault Reports
SnapVault Sec Configuration List primary and secondary paths, with success/failure statistics.
SnapVault Summary View a list of SnapVault transactions, by destination location.
SnapVault Schedule List the SnapVault schedules with array and volume information.
SnapVault Status Display a bar chart for an at-a-glance view of SnapVault status, with drilldown access to
details.
SnapVault Data Transfer Display a bar chart that represents the amount of data transferred.
SnapVault Relationship Summary List source-destination pairs for SnapVault transactions.
Data Protection Dashboard List SnapVault paths with colored success/failure indicators that drilldown to details.
SnapVault QTrees at Risk List SnapVault QTrees that are at risk of exceeding available capacity.
FlexClone Reports
FlexClone Summary List FlexClone transactions with Aggregate available capacity.
Aggregate Mirror Reports
Aggregate Mirror Summary List Aggregate Mirror status.
Available Reports 9
Logging In/Off the Portal
The Portal allows more than one Administrator and User to be logged on
simultaneously.
The Portal works with the following browsers:
Browser Mac Windows Unix Linux

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0+, 8.0+ x
Mozilla Firefox 2.0+, 3.0+ x x x x
Apple Safari 3.2+ x x
Table 1.2 Supported Browsers
To log in to the Portal:
1. Do one of the following from your browser:

• If your company hosts the Portal, go to http://aptareportal.mydomain.com.
• If a third-party hosts your Portal, go to http://my.storageconsole.com.
The Portal login window appears.
2. Type your email address and password, then click the Login button.
If this is your first time logging in to the Portal, your Administrator provided you a default
password.
To log off the Portal:
Click on Logout in the upper right-hand corner of the Portal toolbar.

The login page and a message appears, confirming that you’ve successfully logged off
the Portal.

Managing My Profile
While the Application Administrator has the responsibility of setting up login access,
you can update certain other fields in your profile.
To update your profile:

1. From the Portal toolbar, select Tools > My Profile.
2. Modify any of the following fields:
• First name
• Last name
• Email
• Work phone
• Cell phone
Note: Your login ID can be updated only by the Application Administrator. To change your
password, see Changing Your Login Password.
Managing My Profile 11
Changing Your Login Password
If you forget your password, contact your Application Administrator. Your
administrator has the permissions to change any user’s password. Also, follow this
procedure to simply change your password.
The password must be a minimum of 7 characters and contain at least 1 non-alpha
character. It is recommended that you create a strong password.
To assign or change a user password:
1. In the Portal’s toolbar, choose Tools > Change Password.

2. In the User Password pane, type the new user password, confirm the password, then click
Save to update the password.

2
[=‘qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]]
Generating and Maintaining Reports

Chapter1

• About the Report Designer
• About Report Scope
• Selecting Report Scope
• Listing Server Groups
• Searching for Servers
• Report Designer Parameters
• Generating Reports
• Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports
• Sorting Columns in Reports
• Setting Refresh Intervals
• Modifying Reports
• Saving Reports
• Deleting Reports
• Searching for a Report
13
About the Report Designer
The Report Designer tool enables you to specify parameters and then generate a report.
To launch the Report Designer, find a report in the navigation pane at the left of the
Portal window and then expand a menu group and click on any report template, as
shown in the following figure.
The Portal organizes reports into functional groups: Backup Manager, Capacity
Manager, Virtualization Manager, and Replication Manager. These groups are
represented by colored bars in the navigation pane. Click on the colored bar to expand
the tree to view the available menu groups, report templates, and report instances.
To understand Report Designer, you need only understand a few basic report
components, described in the following sections:
• Menu Group
• Report Template and Report Instance
Report Designer displays a pop-up window in which you can specify report criteria, as
shown in the following example. See About Report Scope for details.

Backup Manager Scope Selection
For Backup Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope:
In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.
About the Report Designer 15

Capacity Manager Scope Selection
For Capacity Manager reports, use the following procedure to modify the scope:
In the Report Designer window, click Modify to launch the Client Selection window.

Virtualization Manager Scope Selection
The Virtualization Manager reports enable a variety of mutually exclusive scope
selections:
• Datastores - Select specific VM storage locations for a report.
• Hypervisors - Expand the list to select entities within the virtualized platform, such as Data
Centers and VMs.
• Server Groups
About the Report Designer 17

Menu Group
A menu group is a folder that contains all of your report templates. There are several
default menu groups, including Management Reports and SLA Reports. You cannot
delete these default menu groups.
Report Template and Report Instance

A report template provides a structure for generating a report based on parameters that
you specify. The Portal provides many default report templates, such as Job Status
Report and Job Duration report. You cannot change, rename, or delete any default
report templates. However, you can create new report templates and you can generate
reports from existing report templates.
The reports that you generate from a report template are called report instances. You
can create as many report instances as you want. A report instance is a “point in time”
view of the current state of your data. Each time you launch a report instance, the most
current information populates your browser window. You can save a report instance,
which saves the scope and parameters that you specified—not the report output.
Units of Measure in Reports

For certain reports, an Advanced option in the Report Designer enables the selection of
the unit of measure—MBytes, GBytes, or TBytes.
If you notice a discrepancy in the values reported by the Portal reports versus the values
you see in the backup product itself, this is likely due to the conversion of the units of
measure. Note that the Portal uses 1024 for the value of a KB.
So, at first glance when comparing reports, the following may appear to be inaccurate:
84,977,912.22 MB —> converted to GB —> 82,986.24 GB
84,977,912.22/1024 = 82,986.24

About Report Scope
When you generate a report, Report Designer prompts you to define the servers or a list
of clients that you want included in the report scope. Report scope simply refers to the
criteria that you specify to filter the data that’s included in a report.You can scope by the
following filters:
• Server Groups. Refers to the server group(s) and server sub-group(s) that you can choose,
which depends on the home group to which you belong.
• Attributes. Refers to the attributes associated with a server group; for example, operating
system. For more information, go to the APTARE StorageConsole Application
Administrator’s Guide.
• Clients. Select specific clients for a static report. A static report does not take into account
changes in your network topology, so if you add clients to a network, you either have to
explicitly include them in your report scope or add them to a server group. To ensure that
clients are always included in reports, assign them to a server group.
When you generate a report, the Report Designer initiates a database query, based on
the report scope that you specify. Since the nature of your IT environment is dynamic—
that is, it’s not uncommon to add server groups and clients to your network—reports
reflect the updates.
Use the following guidelines to ensure that your reports include the data you expect to
see:
• If you add new server groups after you generate a report, the next time you generate this
same report, it will include different results. When you scope by server group or attributes,
the Report Designer produces a dynamic report.
• If you add clients to your network, but do not assign them to a server group, then generate a
report without including the new clients in your scope, you can be certain that the data for
that client will not be in the report. This type of report scope produces a static report.
However, if you add the client to a server group and this server group is part of the report
scope, the report automatically includes report data for that client.
About Report Scope 19

Selecting Report Scope
You can create static reports or dynamic reports. To create static reports, define your
report scope based on a list of individual clients. To produce dynamic reports, define
your report scope based on domain, server groups, and attributes.
To learn about how report scope selects clients. Go to About Report Scope. For
advanced report filtering, see Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports.
To select report scope:
1. In the Navigation pane, select a report to generate. For example:

Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status Summary
The Report Designer window pops up.
2. From the Report Designer, go to the Scope pane and click Modify. The Client Selection
window launches.
3. Do one of the following:

• Create a dynamic report. In the Server Groups tab, select the group of clients that you
want to include in your report:
• Search for specific servers. See Searching for Servers in Report Designers.
• If you want to begin by including all clients, select the entire domain—the top level
server group. Proceed to Step 4.
• If you want to begin by including specific clients within a server group, select the
check box for that server group. Proceed to Step 4.

• Create a static report. Select a list of individual clients that you want to include in your
report:
• In the Server Groups tab, drill down to each client’s server group and select the
client’s check box; or
• Go to the Clients tab and create a list of clients based on attributes.
4. To narrow your scope and filter the results based on attributes, select the attributes from the
Attributes tab.
5. Click OK. You’ve specified the report scope.
Next If necessary, continue specifying other report parameters, then click Generate to view the
Step report that you designed.
Listing Server Groups

Typically, you generate reports for a specific server group or set of server groups. In
addition, you may want to drilldown to a particular client within a server group. So,
when you are defining the scope of a report, you need to understand the organization of
the server groups in your domain.
To search for a specific server, refer to Searching for Servers.
To view the server groups in your Portal domain, use the following procedure.
1. In the Menu list at the left of the Portal window, expand Server Groups.
2. You can drill down to details for the following information:

• Client - displays the Server Details report
• Server - displays the Server Details report
• Last Backup - displays the Job Details
• Backups This Month - displays the Job Summary report
Note: The Backups this month value does not include failed jobs.
Listing Server Groups 21

Searching for Servers
When you are selecting a scope in a Report Designer window, you may need to find and
verify details about a particular server.
To generate a list of servers, from the Portal toolbar, select:
Tools > Search
Searching Considerations
• Wildcard searches are supported, such as: a*. The asterisk is required for wildcard searches.
• Search results may include servers that appear to be unrelated to the search, as host aliases
also are included in the resulting server list. Click on the server to view the Server Details
Report, which lists Host Aliases.

Searching for Servers in Report Designers
For reports that can be filtered by servers and server groups, the report designer offers a
search capability, as shown in the following example.
Searching for Servers 23

Report Designer Parameters
Each time you generate a report, the Report Designer presents you with report
parameters that you select to tailor the output. For parameter details, see:
• Backup Manager Primary Settings
• Backup Manager Advanced Settings
• Capacity Manager Primary Settings
• Capacity Manager Advanced Settings
Note: Not all reports use all parameters. For example, the Tape Drive Usage and Forecast
Report does not need to take into account specific backup events or status, so those options will
not be displayed in the Report Designer window.
Backup Manager Primary Settings

The availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report
because not all selections and options apply to all reports.
• Time Period • Event Type

• Start Date / End Date • Event Status
• Scope • # of Consecutive Errors
• Group By • Dynamic Report Start & End Times
• Media Status • Cascade into sub-groups
The reporting time periods for this report. Your choices range from
Time the last 12 hours to the last 7 years. The options for this parameter
Period depend on the report.
If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the date format:
Start Date / MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic report—that is, a report that changes
End Date as the underlying data changes—do not specify a start and end date, as the
default always represents the current day.
Table 2.1 Backup Manager Primary Settings

Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a report.
• By Server Group. Includes data from default and user-defined server
groups. For information about server groups, see the Application
• By Attribute. Includes data from default and user-defined attributes or
Scope characteristics. For information about attributes, go to the APTARE
StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide.
• By Clients. Includes data for only specific clients rather than data for
server groups.
To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report Scope.
The type of jobs you are interested in:

• All Backup & Restore Events
• All Backup Events
Event Type • Full Backups
• Incremental Backups
• Restores
Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the bar charts
or tables to be grouped. The available options are dependent on the type of
Group By report. Some reports group by time, while others group data by either
server, client, or policy.
The Media Status parameter is included in the Tape Media Summary

Report Designer. You can specify which media should be included in the
Media report by selecting one of the following options: All Media, Expired
Status Media, Available Media, In Use Media or Full Media.
The default setting for this parameter is All Media.
Applies to all backup event-driven reports. Select from the following event
status options:
• All Events
Event • Successful Events
Status
• Warning Events
• Failed Events
Use this filter to exclude consecutive errors. This option comes in handy
# of when troubleshooting by limiting the report to servers with excessive
Consecutive activity. Select a number from the drop-down list. Only sets of consecutive
Errors errors >= the specified number will be included in the report.
Report Designer Parameters 25

Provides the user with the ability to specify dynamic report start and end
Dynamic day and time. Simply specify the number of days before or after the
Report current day as well as the time for both the start and end day and times to
Start & End be used to generate the report.
Times
The report designer default is to cascade to all child sub-groups when

Cascade generating the report. If you prefer to report ONLY on the server group
into sub- you selected, then uncheck Cascade into sub-groups.
groups
Backup Manager Advanced Settings

The availability of selections, options, and default values varies from report to report
because not all selections and options apply to all reports.
• Start Time / Finish Time • Error Code Excludes

• Time Zone • Ignore Retries
• Parent Job Only • Job Types
• Backup Window
Enables you to instruct the application to use the event start or finish time
as the include trigger when culling the events for inclusion within the time
frame specified for the report.
Start Time / For example, if you only want to display events that occurred between
Finish 12AM and 6:30AM, then specify those times for the start and finish time
Time parameters so that the application filters the events by those time
constraints.
Available in various backup/restore events reports.
Enables you to select a specific time zone to normalize the report by any
time zone equivalent in the world. The default setting for this parameter is
Time Zone the time zone setting of the Management Server.
This option is available only in the Job Status Summary and Job Summary
Parent Job reports. For NetBackup, the Portal groups the jobs with the same parent-
Only child relationship that NetBackup uses. Some customers prefer to see only
the status of the parent jobs, so this option enables that selection.
Select a custom backup window to be applied to the report. Typically,
backups begin at the end of the business day, but they do not finish before
Backup the end of the day—thereby skewing the success statistics for the day. To
Window more accurately reflect backup SLA metrics, you can re-define a day with
a custom backup window. These custom backup windows are defined by
the StorageConsole System Administrator.
Table 2.2 Backup Manager Advanced Settings

Check the Set Error Excludes box and the application will dynamically
generate an Error Code ID/Descriptions Dialogue where you can check all
the error codes that need to be excluded from the report. Then, click
Accept and all the codes will auto-populate the Exclude Id text box.
Error Code Any event which exited with an error code specified in the exclude list will
Excludes not be included in the resulting report.
Note: This functionality currently is available only for the Consecutive
Errors By Client Report.
Ignore Check this box to indicate that retries for backup jobs should not be
Retries incorporated in the statistics shown.
Refers to the type of backup job. Each backup product has its own set of
Job Types job types.
Table 2.2 Backup Manager Advanced Settings

Capacity Manager Primary Settings
The availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for
the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all
reports.
• Storage Arrays • Threshold

• Scope • Group By
• Start Date / End Date • Cascade into sub-groups
Storage Arrays Lists all the storage arrays that the Data Collectors identified.
Use this filter to specify what data will be included in a
report.
• By Server Group. Includes data from default and
user-defined server groups. For information about server
groups, see the Application Administrator’s Guide.
• By Attribute. Includes data from default and user-defined
attributes or characteristics. For information about
Scope attributes, go to the APTARE StorageConsole System
• By Clients. Includes data for only specific clients rather
than data for server groups.
To learn more about the report scope, go to About Report
Scope.
If you want a static report, specify start and end date in the
date format: MM/DD/YYYY. If you want a dynamic report—that
is, a report that changes as the underlying data changes—do
Start Date / End Date
not specify a start and end date, as the default always
represents the current day.
For Capacity At Risk reports only, limit the report output to a

threshold category:
Threshold • Low
• Warning
• Critical
Table 2.3 Capacity Manager Primary Settings

Use the drop-down list to specify how you want the data in the
bar charts or tables to be grouped. The available options are
Group By dependent on the type of report. Some reports group by time,
while others group data by either server, client, or policy.
The report designer default is to cascade to all child sub-

groups when generating the report. If you prefer to report
Cascade into sub- ONLY on the server group you selected, then uncheck
groups Cascade into sub-groups.
Table 2.3 Capacity Manager Primary Settings
Capacity Manager Advanced Settings

The availability of the selections, options within the selections, and default values for
the options vary from report to report because not all selections and options apply to all
reports.
Enables you to specify the output in Terabytes, Gigabytes, or

Capacity Megabytes. For consistency, consider using the same capacity
for all reports.
Table 2.4 Capacity Manager Advanced Settings

Generating Reports
The default reports meet most users’ needs. However, if the default reports do not
include the fields that you need, create a custom report. See “Using Report Template
Designer” on page 62..
To generate a report based on a default report:
Before Identify the report that represents the reporting data that you want. View the list of reports in the
You report group folders in the Navigation pane.
Begin
1. From the Navigation pane, select the report that you want to generate. The Report Designer
launches.
The Report Designer window is unique to the report you are generating, displaying only the
parameters that are relevant to the specific report.
2. Specify the report parameters, then click Generate. Report Designer renders the report in
the Content pane and displays the Toolbar from which you can perform other tasks.
If there is no data on which to report, a report will not be generated.
Note: When the Portal determines that a large amount of data has been returned for display, the
resulting report window provides paging links: Previous and Next.
Next After generating a report you can do a few things:
Step
• Save the report. Go to Saving Reports.
• Schedule an automated report based on the report you generated.Go to “Scheduling Emailed
Reports” on page 46.
• Instantly email the report to yourself or others. Go to “Emailing Reports” on page 45.
• Export the saved report in one of the following common formats: HTML or CSV.
• Share a report to a message group.

Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports
In addition to the filtering that is achieved in the Report Designer window, table-
formatted reports can be further filtered on Rows and/or Columns, using the following
procedures.
Note: To optimize performance, be sure to use the filtering that’s available in the Report
Designer before using any advanced filtering.
Filter Report Rows

When you filter rows, you define the criteria for the data rows you want to see in the
report. Drop-down lists enable selection from the available columns. Then, you supply
the operator—such as equals or does not contain—and a value for that column. Up to 4
criteria selections can be joined to form the filter.
Filtering Limitations: Filtering on exact decimal values may produce inconsistent
results, as reports display rounded values of higher-precision data. For example, a filter
of MBytes equals 150.95 will return rows with rounded values. To configure a filter that
more precisely narrows the content, include additional row-filtering criteria with > and
< logic to limit the data that is displayed.
Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied.
1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report.
2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter.
3. In the first drop-down list, select a column name.
4. In the second drop-down list, select an operator.
Operator Description
equals1 Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to
the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date or
String.
not equal1 Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal
to the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date
or String.
greater than Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater to
the value entered. The column can be of the type Number, Date,
Duration, and File Size.
less than Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller
than the value entered. The column can be of the type Number,
Date, Duration, and File Size.
greater than or equal to Filters rows where the value of the associated column is greater
than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type
Number, Date, Duration, and File Size.
less than or equal to Filters rows where the value of the associated column is smaller
than or equal to the value entered. The column can be of the type
Number, Date, Duration, and File Size.
Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports 31

contains1 Filters rows where the value entered is present anywhere in the
value of the associated column. Example: If the column value is
“rattle” and the value entered is “rat” or “at” the row will be
displayed. The column can only be of the type String.
does not contain 1 Filters rows where the value entered is not present anywhere in the
value of the associated column. The column only can be of the
type String.
Includes Filters rows where the value of the associated column is equal to
any of the comma-separated values entered. Example: If you enter
a value “chair, table, desk” and the column value is “table” the row
will be displayed. The column can be of the type Number, String,
Duration, and File Size.
Excludes Filters rows where the value of the associated column is not equal
to any of the comma-separated values entered. The column can be
of the type Number, String, Duration, and File Size.
matches regular expression Filters rows where the value of associated column matches the
regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the type
String.
does not match regular Filters rows where the value of associated column does not match
expression the regular expression2 entered. The column can only be of the
type String.
1 -is case insensitive. 2 –reference: http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.4.2/docs/api/java/util/regex/Pattern.html
• When filtering on Indicator Lights, as shown in the following example, filter on the
color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.
• To combine several expressions into one filter, select an and or or operator from the
drop-down list at the end of the row.
• When filtering on Dates, refer to the above table to determine which columns can be
filtered on date. Be aware that filtering on Dates needs to be carefully designed in order
to avoid degradation of performance. Date criteria can be specified in the following
formats:
mm/dd/yyyy Specified date
Now Current date and time
Today Current day
+nd Enables a variable time frame (plus or minus a number of days)

-nd For example: +2d
This criteria can be combined with Today.

For example: Today-5d
5. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied.

The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter.
When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.
Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports 33

Filter Report Columns
When you filter columns, you check the columns that you want to appear in the report
and uncheck the columns that you want displayed.
Note: Reports can have both row and column filters applied.
1. Generate a table report, such as the Job Summary or the VM Summary report.
2. In the output window of the report, right-click select Filter.
3. In the Report Filtering window, click the Columns tab to view the list of columns.
All of the columns initially will be checked.
4. Uncheck the columns that you want to remove from the report.
5. Click OK to re-generate the report with the filter applied.
The report will now contain a filter applied link, enabling access to the defined filter.
When you save this report instance, the filter is saved with it.
Sorting Columns in Reports

For reports that display data in tables, you can easily change the order that data is
displayed in columns.
To sort columns in a table report:
• From the report, click on any of the table headings to sort the data for that heading in
ascending order.
• From the report, click the heading a second time to sort by descending order.
• To return to the report’s original order, click the Customize button and Re-Generate the
report.
Setting Refresh Intervals

Once you have generated and saved a report, you may want to periodically refresh the
data that is displayed. The following characteristics apply to refresh intervals:
• A report or dashboard first must be saved before a refresh interval can be configured.
• Available refresh intervals include: 3, 5, 10, or 15 minutes.
• A report that is refreshing will have its last refresh time displayed in the tab of the window.
• Refresh intervals are not persistent—that is, once a report is closed, its refresh setting is
cleared.
• To cancel a report that is refreshing, simply close the tab.

To set a report or dashboard to refresh its display every few minutes, use the following
procedure.
1. Generate the report and save it.

A report must be saved in order to have the refresh capability associated with it.
2. Right-click within the content of the report window to display a context menu.
3. Select Set Refresh Interval from the context menu.
4. Set the refresh rate to 3, 5, 10 or 15 minutes and click OK.
Modifying Reports
You can modify the parameters of a report instance. After you generate a report, the
Report Designer renders the report in the browser window, along withe a report toolbar
from which you can choose to customize (modify) the report instance.
To modify a report instance:
1. Click on the report instance that you want to modify. The Report Designer renders the
report and displays a Toolbar in the Content pane.
2. From the Toolbar, click Customize.
3. Change the report parameters, then click Re-Generate.
See Saving Reports for details on saving report instances.
Modifying Reports 35
Saving Reports
Recall that you only can save a report instance—that is, a report that you generated,
based on one of a default Report Templates. When you save a report instance, you are
saving the definition and parameters, not the report output. Because the Report
Designer saves the reporting parameters only, not the actual report data, you do not
need to worry about running out of disk space. Each time you launch a report instance,
the report’s data refreshes.
Note: To capture report output into a saved file, use the export feature, Exporting Reports.
When you generate a report, the Report Designer renders the report in the Content pane
and then displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to save the report instance.
When you save a
report, the report
instances’
parameters are
saved in the
Reporting
Database. Once
you create a
report instance, it
remains in the
Reporting
Database until you delete it.
To save a report instance:
Before Generate the report if you have not already done so. See “Generating Reports” on page 30..
You
Begin 1. From the report, in the Content pane, click Save.
2. In the Save Report dialog box, specify a descriptive report name, then click Save.
The Report Designer saves the report instance under the report template (folder) in which
you created the report.
To rename or copy a report instance:
1. Generate the saved report instance.

2. Click Replace to overwrite the current instance or Copy to create a copy of the instance.
The copy can have a duplicate name or you can modify the name (recommended) before
copying the instance.
Next If you intend to access this report instance often, consider adding it to your My Reports or to
Step your dashboard. Go to “Creating Dashboards” on page 56 or “Adding Reports to Dashboards”
on page 57.

Deleting Reports
You cannot delete default reports, but you can delete report instances that you created
based on a default report. When you delete a report instance, you permanently delete it
from the Reporting Database.
To delete a report instance:
1. From the Navigation pane, right-click on the report instance that you want to delete.
2. From the shortcut menu, click Delete Saved Report and then confirm your selection.
Searching for a Report

Use the Report Finder to locate a report. Report Finder searches both saved report
instances and default report templates.
To search for a report:
1. From the Navigation pane, locate the Report Finder search bar.
2. In the search box, type in one or more keywords represented in the report name, then click
Find. A list of reports matching your keywords appears in the Navigation pane.
3. To return the Navigation pane to its original list, click Clear.
Report Finder supports a partial-name search. For example, if you’re looking for all
reports related to service-level agreements, you can type SLA to list all relevant reports.
Note that if you establish a standard report-naming convention, this type of search will
be more fruitful.
Deleting Reports 37
3
Distributing, Sharing, Scheduling, Alerting

Chapter2

• Exporting Reports
• Scheduling Exported Reports
• Emailing Reports
• Scheduling Emailed Reports
• Scheduled Reports Administration
• Deleting Scheduled Reports
• Alerting
• Sharing Reports
• Technical Community Sharing
• Adding Notes to Backup Job Details
39
Exporting Reports
If you need to make the report data available to an external application or just save it as
a hardcopy report, you can export a report to a file. The date for the report will be the
date and time that the report was generated. The date and time are derived from the
Portal Server’s time zone, which was determined when your administrator installed the
Portal.
Note: The exporting procedures described in this section should not be confused with
exporting a Custom Report definition (created in the Report Template Designer). This
information can be found in Exporting/Importing Report Templates.
To export report data or schedule an export report run:
Before Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 30.
You
Begin 1. Save the generated report as a report instance and then click on the saved instance to re-
generate it.
2. From the report that you want to export, at the top right of the content pane, click Export.
3. In the Export Report dialog box, choose the format.

The comma-separated-values (csv) and Excel formats are intended for tabular reports;
exporting other types of reports to these formats may result in files that do not exactly
match the report.
Note: Dashboards can be exported only in HTML format.

• CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export
tabular data to a spreadsheet or a database application
such as Microsoft Access.
• Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file
supports MS Excel-specific features.
• XML (.xml). Use this format to access the web page
components.
Export the report as • PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy
distribution and printing.
• HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export
this data as a web page.
Note: The Export-to-HTML process produces a .zip file with
all the necessary files. Extract the files and then click on
report.html to display the report.
Depending on your browser’s settings, the file will be saved to
your default location (typically, Desktop), or a dialog box
launches and requires that you specify the location for the file.
4. Click either Export Now or Schedule.

Note: The Schedule option is available only in saved report instances, as only saved
reports can be scheduled.
If you choose Export Now, you will be prompted to complete the operation—open or save
file.
If you choose Schedule, you will be prompted to configure several settings, as shown in
Scheduling Exported Reports.
Exporting Reports 41
Scheduling Exported Reports
When you schedule a report to be exported on a regular basis, you must first configure a
number of settings.
See Expression Builder for details.

Use the following table to configure a schedule:
To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select

one of the following options from the Export drop-down list:
• On a defined schedule - Master schedules can be configured
and then applied to reports. Modifications to a master schedule
will automatically be applied to all the reports associated with
that master schedule. See the Application Administrator’s
Guide.
• Hourly - Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12 hours.
• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.
Export
• Weekly -
• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run.
• At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.
• Monthly -
• On the. Select the day on which the report will run.
The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day.
This feature enables you to deploy reports that are viewed by a
large audience on a regular basis.
Specify a path where the output will be saved, for example, a web
server directory. You can append sub-directory information to the
beginning of the default path name (/opt/aptare/portal/export).
Then, click Validate to ensure that your path specification will
work.
Note: The scheduler will substitute the underscore character for
invalid characters.
FOR ADVANCED USERS: In some cases (for example,
Managed Services Providers with hundreds of managed server
groups), you may want to export to specific server group or report
Export to the path:* directories. Rather than configure each of these separately, you
can use the following variables in the path specification to
generate an individual report for each instance of the variable:
${serverGroup}
For example: /opt/aptare/export/${serverGroup}/doc
${reportName}
To over-write/replace files each time the reports are exported, use

the variables: ${day}, ${month}, ${year}, ${hour}, ${minute}
where the day, month, year, hour, and minute are represented as
2-digits, such as 02.
Exporting Reports 43
Choose one of the following:
• Existing scope - Creates a single report based on the report’s
scope.
Generate reports for: • Matching server groups - Creates multiple reports, based on
the list that results from the Expression Builder. See Match
server groups on: below.
Note: Dashboards cannot be exported for multiple server groups.
You can specify a regular expression to be used for searching for
server group with pattern matching. Then, click Builder to launch
the Expression Builder window where you can Evaluate the
regular expression to see which server groups are selected.
Examples:
.*NetBackup.* - the period specifies any character; the asterisk
specifies zero or more of the preceding element.
Expression Builder
Match server groups [abc] - simple alpha character match
on: [a-zA-Z] - any alpha character in upper or lowercase
[^abc] - any character except a, b, or c
Note: The Expression Builder is case-sensitive.
For additional regular expression details and examples,

see: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression

Emailing Reports
After you generate a report and the Report Designer renders the report in the Content
pane, the Portal displays the Toolbar from which you can choose to instantly email the
report. You can email a report to yourself, other individuals, or a distribution list.
The Email Report feature comprises both the email function and the report scheduling
function. If you want a report to be emailed on a regular basis, see Scheduling Emailed
Reports.
To email a report:
Before Generate the report if you have not already done so. Go to “Generating Reports” on page 30.
You
Begin 1. From the report that you want to email, at the right of the content pane, locate the report
toolbar and click Email.
The buttons shown above are available only in saved report instances. A subset of these
options is available in unsaved reports.
2. The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for parameters.
The Schedule option is available only for saved report instances.

3. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings:
Emailing Reports 45
When you email a report, you do so instantly—Now. However, you
Email
also can schedule a saved report, as described in “Scheduling
Emailed Reports” on page 46. The other options in this list are
relevant to scheduling report emails at regular intervals.
• CSV (.csv). Use this format if you want to export tabular
data to a spreadsheet or a database application such as
Microsoft Access.
• Excel (.xls). Similar to the CSV export, this file supports MS
Excel-specific features.
Email as
• PDF (.pdf). This read-only file lends itself to easy
distribution and printing.
• HTML (.html). Use this format if you want to export this data
as a web page.
• Image (.gif). Use this image format as a read-only choice.
Email to Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.
Subject Specify an email subject if you want to override the report title.
Sometimes reports contain hyperlinks. When you email a report that
contains links, these links remain active unless the report instance
Use Live links no longer appears in the Reporting Database. For security purposes,
you might not want the links active, in the event that a report user
becomes unauthorized to view the report in the future.
4. Only saved reports can be scheduled for delivery on a regular basis (see Scheduling
Emailed Reports). Click Email Now for reports that have not been saved or if you simply
want to email a saved report immediately.
Scheduling Emailed Reports

When you schedule a report, you actually are configuring it to run and be emailed at
regular intervals. To schedule a report, you must first save it. Then, after you generate
the saved report, you can configure it to run and be emailed on a regular basis.
To email a report at regularly scheduled intervals:
Before Generate the report if you have not already done so, and then save it. Go to “Generating
You Reports” on page 30.
Begin
1. From the saved report that you want to schedule, at the right of the content pane, locate the
report toolbar and click Email.
The Email Report dialog box will prompt you for additional parameters.

Emailing Reports 47
2. In the Email Report dialog box, specify your delivery settings:
To Schedule the report to run on a regular basis, you must select

one of the following options from the Email drop-down list:
Defined Schedule, Hourly, Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.

Guide.
Email • Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific run time.
• Weekly -
• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will run.
• Monthly -
• On the. Select the day on which the report will run.
The Portal can run the same report multiple times in a single day.
Email as Currently, the only available option is HTML.
Email to Provide a comma-separated list of email addresses.
This option is available only when you are scheduling a tabular
Email if empty
report to be emailed at regular intervals. Sometimes reports might
not have any data. If you don’t want to email empty reports,
choose No.

Scheduled Reports Administration
The scheduled reports that you can access depend on your user type:
• If you are an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and all users’ scheduled
reports.
• If you are not an Administrator, you can view your scheduled reports and those that belong to
other users in your home group.
From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports.
See Expression Builder for details.

Note: The Scheduled Reports Administration options will differ depending on how the report
was scheduled, either as an email or a file export. Refer to Scheduling Emailed Reports and
Scheduling Exported Reports for details.
Scheduled Reports Administration 49

Deleting Scheduled Reports
Scheduled reports can be deleted by first viewing the list of scheduled reports and then
deleting selected reports.
To delete a scheduled report:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Scheduled Reports.

A list of scheduled reports appears in the Scheduled Reports Administration window.
2. Use the typical Ctrl-click and Shift-click mouse functions to select reports and then click
Delete.

Alerting
Use the alerting feature to notify you when a tabular report has been populated with
data. For example, save a Job Summary report for Failed Events and then configure an
alert for this report. The Portal will check, according to the schedule you select, for a
report that contains data.
An alert can be delivered via the following mechanisms, described in detail later in this
section:
• Email
• Script
• SNMP
• Native log
Configuring an Alert for a Tabular Report Instance

Alerting can be configured for any report that contains a single table.
Use the following procedure to configure an alert for a report.
1. Save a report instance.

2. Generate the saved instance.
3. Right-click in the report window to launch the Alerting window.
4. Use the following table to configure an alert:
Alerting 51
To Schedule a report to be checked for alerts on a regular basis,
you must select one of the following options from the drop-down
list:
Guide.
• Daily - At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.
Schedule an Alert • Weekly -
• On every. Check the day(s) on which the report will be
checked.
• At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.
• Monthly -
• On the. Select the day on which the report will be
checked.
• At: hour/minute. Select a specific time.
The Portal can check the same report multiple times in a single
day.
Email
Check the box and provide a comma-separated list of email
addresses.
The user-created script needs to reside in:
/opt/aptare/user_scripts
Check the box and enter a shell script name (UNIX). If a path
Script name is included, it will be appended to the above path.
For example, filter a report to include only the columns that will
supply values to your ticketing system. The script should include
variables that match the report columns so that the values can be
passed on to your ticketing system.
When you check this box, the Port, Community string, and
Management servers fields will be populated from the configured
defaults. To override the defaults, overwrite any or all of the three
SNMP SNMP fields.
Administrators: To configure SNMP default values, see Adding/
Configuring a Domain in the Application Administrator’s Guide.
Native Log
When this box is checked, a log entry is written to the OS-specific
log: either the Windows event log or the UNIX/Linux syslog.
5. Click OK to save the alert configuration.

6. To view the alerts, select Report > My Scheduled Reports. For details on managing alerts
in the Scheduled Reports list, see Scheduled Reports Administration.

Sharing Reports
You cannot share report templates, but you can share saved report instances. This
procedure assumes that you already created and saved the report that you want to share.
You can share a report with any number of users or user groups, however, the users
must be part of a group.
To share a report:
1. From the report that you want to share, at the right of the content pane, locate the report
toolbar and click Share.
A pop-up window presents you with a list of users and groups.
2. Check any number of users or user groups.
3. Check the shared report scope:
• Actual selected scope - When this option is selected, users may be able to access data
that is not in their home group.
• User’s home group - This option limits access to data within the user’s home group. For
example, a Managed Services Provider may create a report and share it with multiple
clients in different home groups. These users will only be able to access the data for their
specific home group.
Note: Custom reports, created with the Report Template Designer, always are restricted
to the user’s home group.
4. Click Share.
To access reports that you shared with others:
From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > My Shared Reports.

To access reports that others shared with you:
From the Portal Navigation pane at the left of the window, click on the Shared Reports
menu group.
Technical Community Sharing

A Community News Group offers a forum for sharing not only product news, but tips,
questions, and strategies for using various products and reports. In addition, Report
Template Designer SQL queries are posted in the forum’s Report Exchange.
The Forum is accessible in the following ways:
• In the Portal: Help > Forum
• URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com
Sharing Reports 53
Adding Notes to Backup Job Details
Notes associated with backup job details enable you to fulfill compliance audit
requirements. When a backup job fails, you can use notes to document remediation
steps taken.
You can attach a note to a backup job’s detail. You can use notes to:
• Specify the cause of a failed job, and how you or a third party resolved the problem.
• Provide an audit trail.
• Share information with others.
For details about notes, see the Job Details Report. Also, see Example of Listing Jobs
With Notes.

4
Organizing Reports
Chapter2

• Task Overview: Organizing Reports
• Creating Dashboards
• Adding Reports to Dashboards
• Deleting Reports from Dashboards
• Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group
• Creating a Custom Menu Group
• Changing Your Home Page
Task Overview: Organizing Reports

So that you can easily retrieve your reports, consider using the following features to
organize your reports:
• Dashboards
• My Reports
• Custom Menu Group
• Home Page Setup
To organize your reports, perform the following sequence of steps:
Task For Instructions
1. If you have reports that you need to access daily • Creating Dashboards
or throughout the day, create dashboards and add • Adding Reports to Dashboards
reports to those dashboards.
2. If you have reports that you need to access • Adding Reports to a Custom Menu
regularly, add those reports to My Reports. Group
3. Organize your reports into logical groupings by • Creating a Custom Menu Group
creating custom menu groups.
Task Overview: Organizing Reports 55

Creating Dashboards
Dashboards provide easy access to your reports. A
dashboard is a canvas to which you can drag and drop
reports. Consider creating a dashboard to contain
reports that you need to access regularly and quickly.
More importantly, use dashboards to view multiple
scenarios simultaneously. The Portal provides several
default dashboards, and you can easily create your own.
Use dashboards to combine multiple reports into one view:
• To monitor running jobs for three different backup servers, run each independent report and
then group them into a single dashboard.
• To troubleshoot a particular backup problem, you can gather data from multiple reports in
one view.
Dashboard Example
By correlating data from multiple reports, you can determine if your storage units are
functioning properly.
1. Using the Real Time Library and Drive Status report, you can determine if drives are
available.
2. Then, in the Running and Queued Jobs Summary, you can see what jobs are currently
running.
If there are jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a
storage unit, something may be preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running
status.
Note: If you need to access specific reports regularly and quickly, but do not need to view these
reports simultaneously because the reports are independent of each other, simply add these
reports to your My Reports menu group instead.
To create a dashboard:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Report > New Dashboard. The New Dashboard dialog
box appears.
You also can create a new dashboard by right-clicking in any part of the Portal window
(even within a report) and then selecting New Dashboard.
2. Generate each report that you want to be included in the dashboard you are developing.
3. Once all of the reports are generated, click on the tab of the New Dashboard that you
started.
4. Click and drag the tab of each report that you want to place into the dashboard. These
reports will become “portlets” within the dashboard.
You’ll notice as you drag the report into the dashboard, a blank grayed-out pane appears
before the report docks in the dashboard. Once the portlets are placed in a dashboard, you
can re-position them by dragging them to a new position.
Add the relevant reports to your dashboard. Go to “Adding Reports to Dashboards” on page 57.

Adding Reports to Dashboards
You can add report instances
that you create to a personal
dashboard. There is no limit to
the number of reports that you
can add to a personal dashboard.
Each time you add a report to
your dashboard, the reports
appear side by side in the same
window pane.
Note: A report that has been
generated as a result of a drilldown
in another report cannot be saved or
added to a dashboard.
To add a report to a new dashboard:
1. From the report, right-click on the chart and choose New Dashboard.
2. In the New Dashboard text box, type the name of the dashboard and click Create.
To add reports to an existing dashboard:
1. Generate the dashboard, as shown in the previous procedure.

2. From the Navigation pane, click on the report that you want to add to your dashboard and
generate that report.
3. Go to the tab of the report at the top of the window and drag the report to your Dashboard
menu group. This report will become a “portlet” within the dashboard.
Dashboard Example
Adding Reports to Dashboards 57

To add saved reports to an existing dashboard:
1. Create a new dashboard or open an existing dashboard.

2. Grab the saved report name from the menu list at the left of the Portal window and drag it
into the dashboard, dropping it into place when you see a gray rectangle, as shown in the
following example:
Deleting Reports from Dashboards

As you use your custom-designed dashboards, you may find that some reports aren’t
relevant to the context that you’ve created.
To remove a report from a dashboard:
From the dashboard, right-click on the report portlet that you want to remove, then click
Remove Portlet From Dashboard.

Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group
If you need to access specific and unrelated reports regularly and quickly, simply add
these saved report instances to your My Reports menu group or a Custom Menu group
(see Creating a Custom Menu Group). Both custom report templates and saved report
instances can be placed into this group. This section describes the process of adding
saved report instances to My Reports.
To add reports to My Reports or a custom menu group:
1. Click on the report instance and drag it on top of the My Reports or custom menu group.
When you drag a report to the My Reports menu group, place the report name on top of the
menu group label before dropping it into the group.
When you place a saved report instance into this menu group, the menu item simply
points to the actual report instance. Therefore, if you delete the saved report instance, it
automatically will be removed from My Reports or the custom menu group.
Creating a Custom Menu Group

Once you have accumulated several saved report instances and report templates, you
may find that you can better organize them by creating your own menu groups within
the My Reports group.
To create a Custom Menu Group in the My Reports group:
1. Right-click on top of My Reports and select New Menu Group.
2. Drag saved report instances and drop them onto the name of this Custom Menu Group.
3. You can right-click and take the following actions:
Adding Reports to a Custom Menu Group 59

Changing Your Home Page
The Home page is associated with a User and it is displayed when the user logs in. the
Portal ships with a default home page, however, each user can set a different report as
his home page.
To display your home page:
From the Portal Toolbar, select Report > Go To My Homepage.
To change your home page:
From the report, right-click on the chart or table, then choose Set As My Homepage.
In the top left of the window, you’ll see the status of this action: Homepage set...

5
Custom Reports
Chapter2

• Using Report Template Designer
• Creating a Custom Report Template
• Configure Report Designer Components
• Specify the SQL Query
• Sample Queries
• Using Functions in Queries
• Format the Output
• Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns
• Exporting/Importing Report Templates
About Custom Reports

The Portal comes packaged with a set of default report templates. You can customize
these Backup Manager and Capacity Manager templates in a number of ways:
• narrow the report scope to specific server groups
• modify parameters, such as the time period or event type.
After you have customized a default report, you can save it with its new parameters for
on-going use. See About the Report Designer for details.
In addition to customizing default report templates, you can create your own
dashboards to combine several reports into one view. See Creating Dashboards for
details.
Once you’ve become familiar with the default reports and also the types of data
collected, you may want to design reports that serve your unique reporting needs. See
Using Report Template Designer for details.
About Custom Reports 61

Using Report Template Designer
Use the Report Template Designer to create custom reports. To access custom reports created by
other StorageConsole users, go to the Report Exchange section of the Community Forum: Help >
Forum
This section includes details for the following Report Template Designer options and features:
• Date Range
• Server Groups and Client Scope
• Custom Text Fields
• Static Custom Combo Box
• Query Custom Combo Box
• Using Functions in Queries
• Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns
• Export a Report Template and Import a Report Template
• Sample Queries
To create a custom report template:

From the Portal toolbar, select Report > Template Designer.
The initial display of the Report Template Designer window begins with the Report Designer
components. In this window, you can either:
• Select components to be used to construct the report template.
• Configure components to customize the way they are presented in the Report Template. See Configure
Report Designer Components.

To navigate the Report Template Designer, use either the tabs at the top of the window, or click
Next at the bottom of the window.
Report Using the checkboxes, specify which parameters you want the user to
Designer specify in the Report Designer window, when the report is generated.
• Date Range
• Time Period - See Date Range for particulars.
• Server Groups and Client Scope - See Server Groups and Client Scope.
• Custom Text Fields - See Custom Text Fields for a description and
example.
• Static Custom Combo Box - See Static Custom Combo Box for details.
• Query Custom Combo Box - See Query Custom Combo Box for details.
To customize any of the above options, see Configure Report
Designer Components.
After you complete the selections within the tabbed Report Designer
window, click on Next to go to the Query window where you will
Specify the SQL Query.
Query The Query provides a window in which you must type your SQL
statement. In addition, a list of valid database views and fields can be
used to create your select statement. When you click Validate, the
Report Designer checks your SQL statement for valid syntax before
you can exit the designer. See Specify the SQL Query.
Using Report Template Designer 63

Formatting To format the output for a report template, select the information that
you want included in the report, as well as the report output style—
Table, Bar Chart, or Pie Chart. See Format the Output.
Save & Save and share custom report templates with others. You can select
Share individual users or groups, and also the menu group in which it will
appear. Once you have saved a report template, you can edit the
template. See Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns.

Creating a Custom Report Template
The Report Template Designer supports select statements. You cannot specify
UPDATE, DROP, ALTER, or CREATE statements. After creating a Custom SQL
report, it can be saved and shared for future use. When you save the report, you can
select the report group under which it will appear in the Navigation pane.
Using the Report Template Designer, take the following steps to create custom reports
for your environment:
• Configure Report Designer Components
Configure Report Designer Components

When you create a Custom Report, you can provide the user with a Report Designer
interface, similar to the out-of-the box StorageConsole reports. Then, each time a report
instance is generated from the Report Template, the user can select parameters to be
used for report generation.
Date Range
Configure this component to provide the time with the date range. Choose Yes or No to
specify if the time will be shown along with the date range.
Server Groups and Client Scope

This Report Designer component enables you to customize how the report will display
the server groups’ data.
Use this configuration to specify if the cascade to sub-groups option is available and, if
available, the default setting—Checked or Unchecked.
Creating a Custom Report Template 65

Custom Text Fields
This Report Designer option broadens the capabilities of the custom report query. In the
Report Template Designer, a user can define fields that then can be substituted into a
query. When the report is generated, the Report Designer window presents the fields
that can be selected, thus providing dynamic input for the report instance.
This option enables you to create three free-form text fields, where you can specify a
field that you want to use in your query. For example, you might enter Host Name, so
that when you form the query, you can specify a host name to be inserted into the query.
Example
The following steps illustrate the advantage of Custom Text Fields.
1. In the Report Template Designer, select the Custom Text Fields component and click
Configure.
2. In the Custom Text Fields configuration window, define a field named Host ID and click
OK.
3. To use this newly configured Custom Text Field, be sure to select the checkbox.
4. In the Query window, enter the following SQL query by typing a partial statement and then
double-clicking to select fields:

select * from aps_v_host_volume where host_id > ${freeText1}
This query can be constructed by combining typing with double-clicking selections in the
window, as shown in the following example:
The resulting query will be:

select * from aps_v_host_volume where aps_v_host_volume.host_id < ${freeText1}
5. Click Validate Query.
6. In the Formatting window, select all the fields for a table.
7. Save the report template with a name and a menu group.
8. Generate the report from this report template and in its Report Designer window, provide a
value for the Host ID field. This value will be passed to the query.

Static Custom Combo Box
The Report Designer Static Combo Box component enables the flexibility of offering
the selection of various characteristics when the report is generated—similar to the way
the out-of-the-box reports handle options, such as Event Type or Job Type. A Combo
Box becomes available in the Report Designer, enabling a user to select items from a
drop-down list.
Specify a heading, along with a list of values that will be displayed as a drop-down
selection.
To include a blank or no choice option, specify the list of values in the form:
,option 1,option 2
If this no choice option is selected when the report is generated, an empty string will be
passed to the SQL expression.

Example of a Combo Box
1. Create a Custom Combo Box to enable the user to select all servers for a particular Make:
2. This Combo Box can be used in a report template query, such as:
select * from apt_v_server where apt_v_server.make = '${freeCombo}'
Note: In this example, the Combo Box variable is a string, so it must be enclosed in single
straight quotes to be evaluated as a text field, as shown in the above example.
3. Format this report as a table.

4. Save it as List Servers by Make in a Menu Group.
5. Generate a report from this newly saved report template.

In this example, a Combo Box heading was specified with a list of values that will be
presented in a drop-down list in the Report Designer, when the user generates the report:
6. Select a Make from the drop-down list and click Generate.
Query Custom Combo Box

The Report Designer offers a feature to design a combo box that is populated with the
results of the query. In addition to configuring the Query Custom Combo Box, a
relevant report template query must be constructed to enable accurate report filtering
using the combo box.
1. In the Report Designer component, double-click Query custom combo box to access the
configuration window.
2. In the Heading field, enter the heading that will appear in the Report Designer with the
drop-down list.

3. In the Custom Combo Box query field, supply a query with the following components and
then click Validate.
SQL command SELECT DISTINCT

Key field, The comma-separated key and value pair are derived
Field value from a published view. For example:
Key: storage_array_id
Value: array_name
The Key in the key-value pair is what will substitute the
${queryCombon} variable and the Value is shown in the
Combo box.
See the Programmer’s Reference Guide for descriptions of
the published database views, including the available
fields. In addition, these views and fields are available via
the Report Template Designer Query component. See
Specify the SQL Query.
Published view End the SELECT statement with FROM and the
published view, with optional list criteria. For example:
FROM aps_v_array_group ORDER BY array_name ASC
Sample Query Custom Combo Box Queries

SELECT DISTINCT server_id, server_name FROM apt_v_job
SELECT DISTINCT client_id, client_name FROM apt_v_job
SELECT DISTINCT product_type, product_type_name FROM apt_v_job
SELECT DISTINCT job_type, job_type_name FROM apt_v_job
SELECT DISTINCT vendor_status, vendor_status_name FROM apt_v_job
SELECT DISTINCT policy_id, policy_name FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail
SELECT DISTINCT policy_type, policy_type_name FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail
SELECT DISTINCT media_server_id, media_host_name FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail
SELECT DISTINCT storage_array_id, array_name FROM aps_v_array_group

4. In the Report Template Designer Query tab, enter a SQL query that will use the value
selected in the populated combo box. For example:
Note: If the Combo Box variable is a string, it must be enclosed in single straight quotes to be
evaluated as a text field. The above example is a numeric, so single quotes are not used.

Specify the SQL Query
To see the available database views and fields that can be used when you create a query,
see the StorageConsole Database Programmer’s Guide.
1. In the Query window, construct your select statement using the following tips:
• Use the drop-down list at the bottom left of the window to select views and fields.
• Use these lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables.
• To insert a view name into a query, double-click on a field and then delete the field
portion. For example, in the aps_v_database_datafiles_log view, click on datafile_id.
Then, in the query, delete the .datafile_id portion.
• Double-click on fields to insert them into the query with the correct syntax.
• Double-click on variables in the list at the right of the window, to insert variables with
proper syntax into the query—for example, ${endDate}
• If you checked Server Group and Client Scope in the initial tabbed Report Designer
window, you’ll see that the drop-down list of Report Designer Variables (at the right of
the window) includes Report Scope selections. Using these selections, you can
enumerate a list of values for Server Groups (serverGroups) and Clients (hosts).
For examples of queries, see Sample Queries.
2. Click Validate Query.
• Correct the statement before you proceed.
• Use the available lists to look up the valid tables, fields, and variables.
• Once the query validates, click Next to proceed to Format the Output.

Sample Queries
The following queries can serve as a starting point to give you ideas of how to create
your own custom queries. In fact, you simply can copy and paste a query from these
examples to demonstrate the results in the Report Template Designer.
Technical Community Report Sharing

Additional SQL queries are posted by the user community on the News Group Forum
(Report Exchange), accessible in the following ways:
• In the Portal: Help > Forum
• URL in browser: http://newsgroup.storageconsole.com
Example of a Report of Failed Backup Jobs

The following example results in a list of failed jobs.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check both Date Range and Server Groups and Client
Scope.
2. In the Query window, enter the following select statement and click Validate Query:
SELECT apt_v_job.job_id,apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name,
apt_v_job.server_id, apt_v_job.server_name,
apt_v_job.start_date,apt_v_job.vendor_state_name,
apt_v_job.vendor_status_name
FROM apt_v_job
WHERE apt_v_job.summary_status = 2 --Failed jobs
AND apt_v_job.start_date > ${startDate}
AND apt_v_job.start_date < ${endDate}
AND apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts})
3. In the Formatting window, select the fields to be displayed. For this example, it makes
sense to Select All and display the report as a Table.
4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish.
5. When you run this report, specify either a time period or start and end dates. You also can
modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.
The output will look something like this:

Example of a Server Group Membership List
The following example reports on server group membership, in display name order.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check only Server Groups and Client Scope.
SELECT g.group_name, s.server_id, s.display_name client,
s.hostname, s.ip_address
FROM apt_v_group_member m, apt_v_group g, apt_v_server s
WHERE g.group_id = m.group_id
AND m.child_type = 2 --Server (excludes children that are server groups)
AND m.child_id = s.server_id
AND s.server_id IN (${hosts})
ORDER BY s.display_name, g.group_name
sense to select all and display the report as a Table.
4. Click Next, enter a report name and select a Menu Group. Then, click Finish.
5. When you run this report, you can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific
server group.
Note that the column header “client” was substituted for the field name, as specified in the
query. You can specify similar substitutions using the Formatting window in the Report
Template Designer.
6. Since this query is ordered by display name and then group name, it may be more
reasonable to display the output in a similar fashion. Use the Formatting tab to re-arrange
the table columns (Move Up, Move Down). See Format the Output.

Example of an Exposed Clients Report
The following example lists the clients within the report scope that have not been
backed up within the selected time frame.
Scope.
SELECT apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id,
apt_v_job.server_name
FROM apt_v_job
WHERE apt_v_job.client_id IN (${hosts})
AND apt_v_job.summary_status IN (0,1) -- Success or Warning
HAVING MAX(start_date) < ${startDate}
GROUP BY apt_v_job.client_id, apt_v_job.client_name, apt_v_job.server_id,
apt_v_job.server_name
4. Click Next, enter a report name and click Finish.
5. When you run this report, specify the start and end dates or a time period. So, for example,
you could select Last 72 Hours and it will be substituted for startDate, listed in the query.
You can modify the scope to generate the report for a specific server group.

Example of Listing Jobs With Notes
The following example lists the jobs with notes within the selected time frame, ordered
by server, client, job start date, and note entry date. This particular report provides a
quick look at jobs that may need attention because someone has attached a note to the
job.
Scope.
SELECT n.note_date, n.user_id, n.user_note, j.client_name, j.server_name,
j.job_type_name, j.start_date, j.finish_date
FROM apt_v_job j, apt_v_job_note n
WHERE j.job_id = n.job_id
AND j.client_id IN (${hosts})
AND j.start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate}
ORDER BY j.server_name, j.client_name, j.start_date, n.note_date
5. When you run this report, try these selections:
• Time Period: Month-to-Date
• Check Cascade into sub-groups

Example of a Pie Chart for Job Size by Job Type
The following example creates a pie chart that represents the various job types—such
as, application backups, full backups, incremental backups, and restores—as segments
in a pie chart.
1. In the Report Template Designer, do not check any Report Designer items.
SELECT job_type_name,
sum(kilobytes/1024/1024) Job_SIZE_GB
FROM APT_V_NBU_JOB_DETAIL
WHERE
finish_date > sysdate -7
AND job_type_name IS NOT NULL
GROUP BY job_type_name
ORDER BY job_type_name
3. In the Formatting window, select Pie Chart from the Display report as drop-down list.
4. For the Caption field, select job_type_name from the drop-down list.
5. Select all the fields to be displayed.
For a pie chart, you need at least one field to be the caption and another field to be the
segment.
6. Click Next, enter a report name and Menu Group. Then, click Finish.

7. When you run this report, the output will look something like this:
Example of the SQL Custom Join Feature

Backup Exec data collection does not populate tables related to tape media—for
example, apt_v_tape_media. To include this view in a query so that it will work with
Backup Exec data, you’ll need to use an “outer join” (as denoted with (+) in the
following query).
select apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.job_type, apt_v_job_tape_media.media_name,
apt_v_job.client_name, to_char(apt_v_job.start_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM')
start_date, to_char(apt_v_job.finish_date, 'YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss AM') finish_date,
apt_v_job.summary_status, apt_v_job_message_log.message,
apt_v_job_tape_media.tape_media_id, apt_v_job.kilobytes
from apt_v_job, apt_v_job_tape_media, apt_v_job_message_log
where apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_tape_media.job_id (+)
and apt_v_job.job_id = apt_v_job_message_log.job_id
and apt_v_job.server_id in (${rp.hosts})
and apt_v_job.start_date BETWEEN ${rp.startDate} AND ${rp.endDate}
ORDER BY apt_v_job.server_name, apt_v_job.start_date
Example of NetBackup Catalog Space by Client List

This example demonstrates how to include sums of a field.
1. In the Report Template Designer, check Server Groups and Client Scope.
SELECT client_host_name, sum(nbr_of_files),sum(nbr_of_files)*150/1024/1024
FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail
WHERE client_id in (${hosts})
AND summary_status is not null
AND expiration_date <= sysdate
GROUP BY client_host_name
ORDER BY sum(nbr_of_files) DESC
3. In the Formatting window, select all the fields to be displayed and display the report as a
Table.

Using Functions in Queries
The following functions can be used to further expand the capabilities of the Report
Template Designer custom report templates.
Note: In most cases, when inserting a function into a Report Template Designer query, it must
be prefaced with: rtd.
• secsToHoursMinSecs
• getServerGroupContextById
• APTlistOfDates
• APTgetTapeDriveStatusName
• APTgetJobTypeName
• listOfBackupWindowDates
• getServerAttributeValue
• aptStringConcat
• listJobSummaryAfterRestart
secsToHoursMinSecs
This function is useful for converting job duration to a readable format.
secsToHoursMinSecs(totalSecs IN NUMBER)
Example Query:
select rtd.secsToHoursMinSecs (duration_secs) from apt_v_job
getServerGroupContextById
This function provides the capability for getting specific server group data.
FUNCTION getServerGroupContextById(
groupID,
clientID,
depthLevel)
This function returns a character string. Note that in the Report Template Designer
query, the function name must be prefaced with: rtd.
Specify the following arguments:
Argument Name Type Length Description

groupID Number 6 This is the highest level server group to be accessed
clientID Number 6 Specify a specific ID. For the purpose of a SQL query,
insert a field name from a view, as shown in the
following example.
depthLevel Number This number indicates the number of levels down the
hierarchical server group tree you want the query to
search.
Example Query:
select rtd.getServerGroupContextById(100000,server_id,3) from apt_v_server

APTlistOfDates
This function enables you to provide a list of dates to a query.
FUNCTION APTlistOfDates(
startDate IN DATE,
endDate IN DATE,
groupBy IN NUMBER)
This function returns a character string.

Note that in the Report Template Designer query, the function name must be prefaced
with:
rtd.
Example Query:
select * from table(rtd.APTlistOfDates(to_Date('10012008','MMDDYYYY'),
to_date('10032008','MMDDYYYY'), 11))
The output from this example:
THE_DATE
--------------------
01-Oct-2008 00:00:00
02-Oct-2008 00:00:00
03-Oct-2008 00:00:00
The third argument—groupBy—controls the granularity of the results, as follows:
Value Description
1 Group by 15 minutes
2 Group by 30 minutes
10 Group by hour
11 Group by day
12 Group by week
13 Group by month
14 Group by quarter
15 Group by year

APTgetTapeDriveStatusName
Use this function to access data from:
apt_v_tape_drive
query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd.
FUNCTION APTgetTapeDriveStatusName(
vendorProductType,
vendorDriveStatus)
Argument Name Type Length

vendorProductType Number
vendorDriveStatus Character 1
Example Query:
select rtd.APTgetTapeDriveStatusName(d.product_type, d.vendor_drive_status) from
apt_v_tape_drive d

Up
In-Use
In-Use
In-Use
Mounting

APTgetJobTypeName
This function can be used to query database tables related to backup job details, such as
apt_v_job and apt_v_nbu_job.
FUNCTION APTgetJobTypeName(
productType,
jobType,
vendorJobType)
query, the function name must be prefaced with:
rtd.
Argument Name Type Length

productType Number 2
jobType Number 4
vendorJobType Number
Example Query 1:
select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, NULL) from apt_v_job j
Example Query 2:
select rtd.APTgetJobTypeName(j.product_type, j.job_type, n.vendor_job_type)
from apt_v_nbu_job n, apt_v_Job j
where j.job_id = n.job_id

Full Backup
Appl Backup
Appl Backup

listOfBackupWindowDates
with:
rtd.
FUNCTION listOfBackupWindowDates(
startDate,
finishDate,
backupWindowList IN apt_BackupWindowListType)
Argument Name Type

startDate Date
finishDate Date
backupWindowList
Based on the backup window definition, the above function returns a list of the adjusted
start and finish dates.
Example Query:
SELECT start_date, finish_date
FROM TABLE(rtd.LISTOFBACKUPWINDOWDATES(TO_DATE('01012008','MMDDYYYY'),
to_DATE('01072008','MMDDYYYY'),
apt_BackupWindowListType(
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Mon', 40, 64),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Tue', 64, 88),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Wed', 88, 112),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Thu', 112, 136),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Fri', 136, 160),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sat', 160, 184),
APT_BACKUPWINDOWTYPE('Sun', 16, 40)
)
))

12/31/2007 4:00:00 PM 1/1/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/1/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/2/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/2/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/3/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/3/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/4/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/4/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/5/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/5/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/6/2008 3:59:59 PM
1/6/2008 4:00:00 PM 1/7/2008 3:59:59 PM

getServerAttributeValue
This function returns a string—the server attribute value.
with:
rtd.
getServerAttributeValue(
serverID,
attributeName)
Argument Name Type

serverID Number
attributeName String in single quotes
Example Query 1:
select server_id, status
FROM (
select server_id, rtd.getserverattributevalue(server_id,'Status') Status
from apt_v_server s
)
WHERE status IS NOT NULL
order by server_id
aptStringConcat
Use this function in a Report Template Designer query to concatenate string values
returned from a table.
Example Query
select aptStringConcat(hostname) from apt_v_server where rownum < 10
This query in the Report Template Designer will generate output similar to:

listJobSummaryAfterRestart
This function returns a list of NetBackup jobs. It could be used, for example, to
determine ultimate success for NetBackup jobs.
with:
rtd.
listJobSummaryAfterRestart(
startDate,
finishDate,
backupWindowId,
clientList,
excludeStatusList,
excludePolicyList,
excludeClientList)
Argument Name Type

startDate DATE with the value derived from the Report Designer
finishDate DATE with the value derived from the Report Designer
backupWindowId Numeric
clientList numberListType
Example: numberListType(1,2,3)
excludeStatusList numberListType
Example: numberListType(1,2,3)
excludePolicyList numberObjectListType
Example:
numberObjectListType(numberObjectType(1),
numberObjectType(2))
excludeClientList numberObjectListType
Example:
numberObjectListType(numberObjectType(1),
numberObjectType(2)))

Format the Output
1. From the Formatting tab, specify the following:
• Output style—Display the report as: Table, Bar Chart, Pie Chart, or Pivot Table.
Note: When formatting a Pivot Table, only three fields are used (x, y, and a value). Use
the Move Up and Move Down feature to position the fields to easily select three fields.
• Fields from the query that you want to include in the report. Select the checkbox of the
query field to indicate the fields to be displayed.
• Select the Display Field and click Formatting (at the bottom of the window) to view the
formatting options.
• Label—You can re-label the displayed fields to something more relevant to your
needs.
• Data alignment—Left, Center, or Right.
• Aggregation: Sum, Average, Minimum, Maximum
• Number, Size, and Date and Time patterns.These patterns are based on the Java
classes SimpleDataFormat and NumberFormat.
• Type: Bar Chart—See Formatting Example—Bar Chart.
• Type: Pie Chart—If you are formatting a Pie Chart, select a character field from the
Caption field drop-down list. The field formatter will show a Type parameter. For pie
charts, use numeric fields as pie chart segments. See Example of a Pie Chart for Job
Size by Job Type.
• Type: Pivot Table—See Formatting Example—Pivot Table.

2. At the bottom of the Formatting window, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to
organize the fields in the order that you want them to appear in a tabular report. Be sure to
select a row before shifting the fields.

3. In the Save & Share window, complete the appropriate text boxes to save and share the
report, then click OK. You can choose one or more users and user groups. The saved report
template will be listed in the report group that you select.
Configuring a Header and Footer in a Custom Report Template

At the bottom of the Formatting window in the Report Template Designer, click the
Header/Footer button to launch the window where you can define the text and
variables that will be displayed when the report is generated.
Any variables used in the query can be included in a header or footer, as shown in the
above example.

Formatting Example—Bar Chart
The following example illustrates how to create a Bar Chart and then format it with a
dual axis.
1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and
Client Scope.
2. Create a query that has a field for the caption, each of the stacked bars, and the line.
3. In the Formatting tabbed section, select the data points and format each so that you have:
• 1 caption, n bars, and 1 line
Note: The line will be charted on the right-hand axis.

4. Set the color of the bars.
5. Specify the line formatting.
6. Save the report to the My Reports report menu group. Then, click on the saved report
instance to generate it.

Formatting Example—Pivot Table
The following example illustrates a key Report Template Designer formatting feature—
Pivot Tables. A pivot table provides a useful mechanism for aggregating and
summarizing data. In effect, you are taking the flat rows of data and grouping them into
a multi-dimensional representation of the data, enabling easier data analysis. When you
format this report, you can have only 3 fields of data, which will be represented in the
table as the row, column, and data.
1. From the Report Designer tabbed window, select Date Range and Server Groups and
Client Scope and also Custom Combo Box.
2. Select Custom Combo Box and click Configure at the bottom of the Query window.
3. Enter the heading for the drop-down combo box—in this example, Job Size by...
4. Enter the following comma-separated list of values and then click OK:
master_host_name, client_host_name, policy_name, policy_type_name,
schedule_name, schedule_type_name, storage_unit_label
These will be the options that a user can select when generating a report instance.

5. Click on the Query tab and enter the following query:
SELECT to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY') run_date, to_char(${freeCombo}) unit,
trunc(sum(kilobytes/1024/1024)) size_gb
FROM apt_v_nbu_job_detail
WHERE start_date BETWEEN ${startDate} AND ${endDate}
AND client_id in (${hosts})
GROUP BY to_char(start_date,'MM/DD/YY'), ${freeCombo}
6. Click Validate Query and then Next.
7. In the Formatting window, select all three fields: run_date, unit, and size_gb
8. Save the report to a report menu group. Then, click on the saved report instance to generate
it.

Advanced Report Template Options - Drilldowns
Just as the out-of-the-box reports contain links that drill down to other reports, Custom
Reports can be configured to include drilldowns.
Fields from the query can be used in the drilldown syntax.
In the Report Template Designer, in the Formatting window:
1. Select the field that will become the drilldown link.
2. Click Advanced to launch the Drilldown window where you will enter the syntax required
to drilldown to the report.

3. In the Drilldown window, enter the details that the Portal will need to link to the report. The
following example and the accompanying descriptions illustrate the required components
for a drilldown specification.
Example
systemName=displayServerDetail&serverId=${row[‘server_id’].data}
Where:
systemName systemName - The required prefix for drilldowns to

out-of-the-box reports.
templateName - The required prefix for drilldowns to
custom report templates.
<displayReportName> Insert the specific report system name or template name,
along with the variable that is to be supplied by the par-
ent report.
To identify the systemName of an existing report, gen-
erate that report and in the active browser window type:
Ctrl-Alt-T
=${row[‘field_name>’]}.data The syntax required for the field name specification
4. Click OK in the Drilldown window.
Edit a Custom Report Template

Once you have saved a custom-designed report template, you can return to it to edit its
configuration. For example, you can modify the SQL query or share it with additional
users.
To edit a custom report template:

Right-click on the report template name in the menu group (at the left of the Portal
window) and select Edit Report Template.
The Report Template Designer launches so that you can modify the settings.
Editing Report Designer Components

When editing any of the Report Designer components listed in the first Report Template
Designer window, be sure to first select the component and then click Configure, as
shown in the following example:

Exporting/Importing Report Templates
In support of Web 2.0 community sharing, custom report templates can be exported to a
file (.rtd) and then imported into another environment. This feature broadens the access
to already developed, unique reports that may be ideal for your environment.
Export a Report Template

To export a custom-designed report template from your Portal to a .rtd file:
1. Create and save a custom report template using the instructions in Creating a Custom
Report Template.
2. In the Report Navigator pane, right-click on the saved report template and choose Export
Report Template.
3. When you confirm your export action in the next window, you are taken to the typical
browser “open/save file” window.
4. Click Save File and OK to save this .rtd file so that it can be shared and imported by others.
5. To Import a Report Template, see Import a Report Template.
Import a Report Template

To import a custom-designed report template, follow these steps.
1. In the toolbar at the top of the Portal window, select Report > Import Template.
2. From the drop-down list, select the destination report folder for the imported template.
3. Browse your local system for the saved template (.rtd) file, select it and click OK.
The imported template will appear in the folder you specified and now can be generated.
4. To Export a Report Template, see Export a Report Template.
RECOMMENDATION: Visit the Report Exchange at the online Community Forum
for report templates that you can import into your Portal. See Technical Community
Report Sharing.

6
[=‘qqqe4r5t6y7u78i90op--[=\\
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\]]]]]]]]]]]
System Administration Reports

Chapter2

• Collection Message Summary
• Data Collection Message Detail
• Database Error Summary
• Report Activity Summary
• Report Activity Detail
• Monitoring Data Collection Status
• Scheduled Reports Summary
• Top Running Reports
• Version History
• Data Collector Status Summary
99
Collection Message Summary
To access this report, in the Navigation pane select:
System Administration Reports > Collection Message Summary
The Collector Message Summary report lists issues that occurred during the data
collection process. Use this report to identify the reason for missing backup and storage
capacity status.
Currently, data collection messages are available only for:
• Legato NetWorker
• HP Data Protector
• Capacity Manager Host Resources
Data Collection Messages can be filtered (in the Report Designer) by the following
criteria:
• by Host (see example above)
• by Data Collector

• by Child Thread
Collection Message Summary

This report is accessed via the Error Occurrences drilldown link in the Collector
Message Summary.
Collection Message Summary 101

Data Collection Message Detail
This report is accessed via the Last Message Date drilldown link in the Collection
Message Summary.

Database Error Summary
System Administration Reports > Database Error Summary
This report provides a diagnostic tool for System Administrators to monitor typical
operational functions. More often than not, you will be requested by Customer Care
Group to use this diagnostic tool and email the report to them for further investigation.
Entries in this report do not necessarily signal problems that require corrective action.
For example, if a user inadvertently attempts to create a Domain Name that already
exists, an entry will be written to the database error log file and also displayed in this
report.
Ideally, this report will rarely list errors that require additional actions, but periodic
monitoring is recommended.
Note: Given that this report extracts customer-specific database messages from a log file,
System Administrators should ensure that only authorized personnel are given access to this
report.
Database Error Summary 103

Report Activity Summary
This report presents a graphical representation of the aggregate of the time for Portal
report generation.
• Mouse over a bar to view the total elapsed time.
• Click on a bar to view the Report Activity Detail.
Report Activity Detail

Then, click on a bar in the graph.

Monitoring Data Collection Status
The details the Data Collection Status tool can be found in the Application
Administrator’s Guide. The following step illustrates the ability to access these reports
from the Data Collection Status window.
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Tools > Data Collection Status.
2. Expand a product folder.
Note: Currently, messages are available only for Legato NetWorker, HP Data Protector, and
Capacity Manager Host Resources. Therefore, the View Messages button will not be accessible
for other types of messages.
Monitoring Data Collection Status 105

Scheduled Reports Summary
System Administration Reports > Scheduled Reports Summary
Use this report to view and manage scheduled reports. Click on the Frequency link to
modify the schedule.

Top Running Reports
Using this report, you can list the reports that have been running for long periods of
time or that have run an excessive number of times. A report will be listed as Top
Running, based on its overall cost to the system, determined by the average execution
time * run count. By default, the most costly reports are listed first. Note that the
average execution time includes not only the database query, but also the time
associated with building the report on the Portal server.
System Administration Reports > Top Running Reports
Select the time range for the list in the Report Designer.
Click the Run Count link to view Top Running Report Details.
Dashboard Considerations
A dashboard that contains four different reports (portlets) will appear in this Top
Running Reports list as four separate records. This summary does not display a row for
the high-level dashboard, just the reports contained within the dashboard.
• If the portlet within the dashboard is a saved instance of a report, the name of the saved
instance will be displayed in the Report Name column.
• If the portlet is not a saved instance—that is, it was simply generated and dragged into the
dashboard—then Dashboard Report will be displayed in the Report Name column.
Top Running Reports 107

Top Running Report Details
The Run Count in the Top Running Reports Summary provides access to the list of
reports that have consumed higher than average resources. Use this list to determine if
any actions need to be taken. For example:
• Adjust the scope of the report to narrow the content.
• Schedule certain top running reports to be run at off hours.
• Verify that automatically schedule reports are scheduled appropriately and are not running
more frequently than is required.
• Consider scheduling frequently run reports to run once, with file system exports or emails to
users.

Version History
System Administration Reports > Version History
The Version History report lists the installation and upgrade events so that you can
determine the current version and history of StorageConsole software upgrades. This
report enables you to verify that the latest patches have been installed.
The Status indicates the success or failure of the installation/upgrade process. The
Comments, if available, are derived from the process as well. In many cases, there
won’t be any specific comments related to the upgrade.
Version History 109

Data Collector Status Summary
System Administration Reports > Data Collector Status Summary
This report provides an at-a-glance view of any issues that may be occurring with your
data collectors.
Use Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports and Alerting to alert you when a Data
Collector status is set to Error.

7
\APTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5
Backup Manager Management Reports

Chapter2

• Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis
• Job Status Summary
• Job Summary Report
• Job Details Report
• Job Volume Summary Report
• Job Duration Report
• Error Log Summary
• Consecutive Errors By Client
• Largest Backup Volume
• Monthly Backup Summary
• Job Summary By Server
• Running and Queued Job Summary
• HP Data Protector Session Summary
• HP Data Protector Session Details
111
Using Backup Manager Reports for Analysis
Management Reports offer a variety of ways to view data. Using high-level reports, you
can quickly summarize your backup status and then when needed, drill down to the
details. The Portal reports will quickly replace your command-line tasks that you use to
cobble together event status information.
These management reports can aid in troubleshooting to:
• diagnose malfunctioning servers
• determine scheduling conflicts
• analyze throughput issues
• identify storage media degradation
The following table lists several examples of exposure analysis tasks and the reports
that support your diagnostic efforts.
What to do: How to do it:
1. Determine the status of your backup Refer to Job Status Summary.
jobs.
• What failed and how severely? Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Status
Summary
• Why did a job take so long?
• Did another job hold it up? Drill down to details.
2. Diagnose backup scheduling issues. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job
Duration Report
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume
Summary
• From this report, you can click on a bar to drill down to
details in the Job Summary report.
3. Diagnose server problems. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log
Summary
• Use the default, Group by Server option.
4. Diagnose client problems. Backup Manager > Management Reports > Consecutive
Errors By Client
• Drilldown to investigate error conditions.
• Use the Consecutive Errors by Client report in
conjunction with the Error Log Summary, which displays
specific error code messages.

Job Status Summary
The Job Status Summary report shows a bar chart that aggregates jobs that succeeded,
failed, or produced warning messages. This high-level summary provides drilldown
access to the Job Summary report, where you’ll find specific status messages and
scheduling information.
When you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow
the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to
Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In
particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available
for this report.
Use this procedure to track down backup failure details:
1. View the Job Status Summary report.
2. Click on the top section of a bar in the bar chart to drill down to details.
The top portion of the bar indicates backup error events, the middle section reports event
warnings, and the bottom represents successful backups. Note that often the partial backups
represent your biggest exposure, so drilling down on the warning events can help you
identify and resolve issues.
When you drill down to details, you are launching the Job Summary Report.
3. In the Job Summary report, view the Job Status column for backup log messages.
4. In the Job Summary report, click on the Finish Date to view the Job Details Report, which
shows additional message-log entries. Be sure to scroll down to the bottom of the list to find
backup attempts and notes related to the job.
Related reports:
• Job Summary Report. This tabular report provides details related to the data represented in
the bars shown in the Job Status Summary chart. You can drill down to the job summary
details from the Job Status Summary bar chart.
• Backup Status SLA Report. In addition to job status, this report provides indicators showing
a trend line of event successes.
1. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart

2. Pop-up Details
3. Job Failures
Job Status Summary 113

The Job Status Summary provides the following information:
Drillable Stacked Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for the
Bar Chart backups corresponding to the time period and event status for the bar
that you selected. The top portion of each bar indicates backup error
events, the middle section reports event warnings, and the bottom
section represents successful backups.
Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups
that provide details.
Job Failures The triangle symbol in the chart tracks to the right y-axis and provides
at-a-glance backup performance statistics—specifically, it reports the
event failures as a percentage of the total events for the selected time
period.

Job Summary Report
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary
When you generate this report, several Report Designer options enable you to narrow
the scope of the report and also to define how the data will be displayed. Refer to
Backup Manager Primary Settings and Backup Manager Advanced Settings. In
particular, note the Parent Job Only and Backup Window settings that are available
for this report.
This report also can be launched from a number of other reports:
• In the Job Status Summary, click a section of a bar to select the job summary by exit
code: event failures, event warnings, or successful backups.
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Duration
• In the Job Duration report, click on a bar for a specific time period.
In the Report Designer, use the following options to filter the output:
• Event Type: All Backup & Restore Events, All Backup Events, Full Backups, Incremental
Backups, Restores
• Event Status: All Events, Successful Events, Warning Events, Successful or Warning Events,
Failed Events
• Not all of the following fields will appear in all Job Summary reports. Many fields are
specific to a backup product. For example, NetBackup jobs will display a Policy field that
may not be displayed in the Job Summary for other backup products. Also, a job’s result
code will be labeled according to the backup product’s standard. For example, NetBackup
uses Exit Code, while Backup Exec uses Result Code.
Job Summary Report 115

Job Summary - Heterogeneous Backup Products
The fields listed in this table reflect the columns that are displayed when the report scope
applies to multiple backup products.
Client Click on a client name for a job to view the client server details.
Server The management server name
Product Vendor-specific backup software
The type of backup job. For a list of the types that are relevant for each
Type backup product, click the Advanced button in the Job Summary Report
Designer.
Start Date Date and time of the beginning of the backup job
Finish Date Click on this link to launch the Job Details report. For HP Data
Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP
Data Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount
points. For these jobs, the finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a
session.
Duration Backup job duration
MBytes Amount written to the backup media
MBytes/Sec Backup throughput
Exit Code The exit code of the NetBackup job. For failed jobs, place your mouse
on top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool
tip.
# of Files The number of files written to the backup media
Tapes Click on a tape link to launch a Tape Details Report.
Backup Exec Job Summary

For a general description of the Job Summary report, see Job Summary Report and Job
Summary Advanced Options.
Job Name For Backup Exec jobs, this name links to the Job Details Report.
Policy The name of the backup policy links to the Backup Policy Details.
Designer.
Device Name For Backup Exec only, the device name.
Resource For Backup Exec only, the resource.

Finish Date Click on this link to launch the Job Details report.
Final Error The final error code of the Backup Exec job. For failed jobs, place your
mouse on top of the red final error code to view the exit code details in
a pop-up tool tip.
Status Indicates the job status: Successful, In Process, Partial, Failed

HP Data Protector Job Summary
Note: For HP Data Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP Data
Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount points. For these jobs, the
finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a session.
IP Address The IP Address of the client
Mount Point For HP Data Protector jobs, the mount point is listed.
Finish Date Click on this link to launch the Job Details report. For HP Data
Protector jobs, multiple items will be reported, representing the HP
Data Protector session, which is a collection of clients and their mount
points. For these jobs, the finish date is derived from one of the jobs in a
session.
NetBackup Job Summary

Job ID The ID of the backup job. Click on this link to view the Job Details
Report.
Backup ID The Backup ID links to the Job Details Report.
Designer.
Start Time Date and time of the beginning of the NetBackup backup job
Finish Time Click on this link to launch the NetBackup Job Details report.

Exit Code The exit code of the NetBackup job. For failed jobs, place your mouse
on top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool
tip.
NetWorker Job Summary

Save Set This NetWorker-specific field indicates the backup save set associated
with the client’s backup job.
Group NetWorker-specific group associated with the backup.
This NetWorker-specific field indicates the backup level/type: Full,
Levels
Incremental, Migration, Manual, Consolidate, Copy, Diff, 1-9, Restore
State Indicates the progress of the backup job, such as Completed or
Incomplete.
TSM Job Summary

Node Name For TSM jobs, the Node Name links to the Server Details report.
Designer.

If a backup schedule is available, this link will display the Policy
Schedule
Domain Details (for TSM).
Exit Code The exit code of the backup job. For failed jobs, place your mouse on
top of the red exit code to view the exit code details in a pop-up tool tip.
Result Code For TSM, the Result Code indicates degrees of success. Refer to the
TSM documentation for details.
Job Summary Advanced Options

In the Job Summary Report Designer, click Advanced to access several advanced
options, as shown below.
The report time period is always in the master server’s time. If you select Advanced
options and change the time zone, the jobs that are returned are based on the time zone
applied to the job start/finish date. The displayed dates are always in the master server
time zone; just the selection of jobs that qualifies in the report time period changes.

Job Details Report
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary
Several reports—for example, Job Summary Report—contain a Finish Date link, which
launches a Job Details report.
Note: For NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs, the Job Details report may include a View
Files button. This option is available if the server has been configured to Capture File Details.
See Capture File Details in the Application Administrator’s Guide. This feature should be used
only for critical servers, as it may impact performance.
Figure 7.1 Example of View Files Button
Job Details Report 121

In the Backup Files Navigator, use the typical click and double-click actions to expand/
collapse folders to view specific files.
Job Details The first column in the job detail provides a complete breakdown of the job. To get
information about the client, management server, or media server, click on their respective
links. The actual job details depend on your report.
Client Click the client name to view the Server Details.
Node Name Displayed only for TSM jobs.

Vendor Vendor-specific backup software.
Product
Backup job unique identifier, For NetBackup jobs, this is
Job ID the ID assigned by the backup software. For all other
backup jobs, this is a unique StorageConsole internal ID.
Backup ID Unique backup ID.
One of the following: Full Backup, Incremental Backup,
Job Type
Restore.
Reflects the success of the job: Partial, Successful,
Job Status
Failed.
Job State Indicates if the job actually finished running.
This vendor-specific code can be used to track down
Result
troubleshooting tips in the backup vendor’s reference
Code
guides.
Scheduled The planned date and time of the job’s initiation.
Start Time
Actual Date and time of the beginning of the backup job.
Start Date
Actual Date and time when the backup job ended.
Finish Date
Duration Backup job duration.
Time zone The time zone where the job ran.

Backup The second column of this report provides server particulars.
Details
Click the Server name to launch the Server Details
Server
report.
Total Job Size Job size in MB.
(MB)
# of Tapes Number of tapes used by this backup job.
# of Files Number of files backed up by this job.
Tape IDs Which tapes were used by the job.
Storage Unit Physical device name.
File List Directory path of the file list location.
Disk Pathnames Disk pathnames
Policy and Click on the policy or schedule name to go to the policy/schedule detail page, which
Schedule provides even more details about the policy and schedule that governs the job.
Details
Click the policy name to launch the Policy Details
Policy Name
screen.
Policy Type Assigned by the System Administrator.
Policy Domain Displayed only for TSM jobs.

Click the schedule name to launch the Policy Details
Schedule
screen.
Schedule Type The name of the schedule type
Compressed/ Indicates how the backup data was treated.

Encrypted
Paths and The paths being backed up for the job are displayed in a comma-delimited list. When there
Related are multiple related jobs, each of the jobs and associated paths is displayed in the related
Jobs jobs listing. Clicking on any of the related job IDs will take you to the Job Details report.
Backup Click on the Media Name to access additional details in the Tape Details report.
Image
Job When there are re-try attempts for any given job, each attempt will be listed in the attempts
Attempts section at the bottom of the Job Detail. Each attempt row displays details of that attempt,
including but not limited to, the backup ID, backup status, started writing date, finished
writing date, and transfer rate.
Job Details Report 123

Adding a Note to a Job
As you view the Job Details report, you can add a note that will remain attached to the
job. The note automatically supplies your email address and the date the note was
added. You supply a message. This feature offers an essential audit trail capability to
ensure Sarbanes-Oxley compliance.
To add a note to a job:
1. Launch the Job Details report from the Job Summary report.
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Job Summary
2. In the Job Summary report, click a Finish Date link to display the Job Details report.
3. In the Job Details report, right-click and then select Add a Note.
In a similar fashion, you can clear all notes.
Tip: When you add a note to a job or clear all notes, you’ll need to refresh the Job Detail page
so that you can view the results of your action.

Job Volume Summary Report
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary
The Job Volume Summary report shows the number of files and amount of data (in KB)
that you backed up for a specified time period. While the Job Status Summary report
approaches the data from an “event status” point of view, the Job Volume Summary
report presents data from the perspective of “how much” has been backed up, with a
focus on determining if your scheduling is balanced.
The true value of this high-level report is its ease of use. At a glance—and with a few
mouse clicks—you can ascertain problematic time periods, consumption trends, and
scheduling peaks.
Use this procedure to analyze volume usage trends:
1. View the Job Volume Summary report.
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Volume Summary
2. Mouse-over a triangle at the top of a bar that indicates a peak usage period.
A pop-up displays the number of files that were backed up for that period.
3. Click anywhere on the bar to launch the Job Summary Report.
In the Job Summary report, pay attention to the data in the following columns: Duration,
Written, MBytes/Sec, Exit Code and Job Status. This data gives you an idea of which jobs
have over-tasked your storage. Remember that you can sort the report columns to group
jobs that took the longest or that failed.
1. Drillable Bar Chart

2. Pop-up Details
3. Backup Volume
4. Backup Files
The Job Volume Summary report provides the following information:
Drillable Bar Click on any of the bars to go to a Job Summary Report page for the backups that
Chart correspond to the time period of the bar that you selected.
Pop-up Details Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide
details.
• Bar: Displays the volume of data backed up for the associated time period.
• Triangle symbol: Displays the total number of files backed up.
Backup Volume Lists the amount of data backed up.
Backup Files Lists the # of files backed up.
Job Volume Summary Report 125

Job Duration Report
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Duration
The Job Duration report combines into one view, information about both backup and
restore duration. If, on a specific day, there were two backup events that completed after
1 hour and 3 hours respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports
a duration of 4.5 hours.
You can also report on a single event type:
• All Backup Events
• Full Backups
• Incremental Backups
• Restores
1. Drillable Bars in Chart

2. Pop-up Details
3. Duration
The Job Duration report provides the following information:
Drillable Bars in Click on any of the bar sections to go to a Job Summary Report for all
Chart corresponding events.
details.
This pop-up lists the total duration for the selected time period.
Duration The total amount of time the backup and restore events took to complete. If on a
specific day there were two backup events that completed after 1hr and 3hrs
respectively, and one restore completed after .5 hours, the bar reports a duration of
4.5 hours.
Use this report as a starting point to determine why certain days show excessive backup
durations.
To diagnose excessive backup durations:
1. View the Job Duration bar chart, looking for excessive duration times.

2. Click on the bar for a troublesome day to launch the Job Summary Report.
3. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Duration column header to sort the data by
Duration. Now you’ll see excessive client usage at the top of the list. You might also sort by
MBytes/Sec to identify throughput issues.
4. In the Job Summary Report, click on the Finish Date of a suspect job to display the Job
Details Report.
By using a combination of reports, you can figure out if some jobs held up others, if
there are server problems that require your attention, or if consecutive errors are
symptomatic of storage device failure or media degradation.
Job Duration Report 127

Error Log Summary
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Error Log Summary
The Error Log Summary reports backup failure details that have been gleaned from
backup error logs. Use this report in conjunction with the Consecutive Errors By Client
report to mitigate future problems by determining which types of errors occurred with
the greatest frequency.
You can customize this summary to report by a specific group:
• Server (the default)
• Client
• Policy
In each of the group views, the Error Code Description typically provides sufficient
details to start your troubleshooting process. For example, a NetBackup error code of
196 would be an indicator that there are not enough resources available and a Virtual
Tape Library (VTL) may be needed. The 196 indicates that the client backup cannot
begin because drives are not available. Refer to the backup product’s reference guides
for additional guidance.
You could investigate further by generating a Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report
to identify how many tape drives are writing and for how long. In addition, the Drive
Utilization and Performance Report provides insight into the throughput, with
drilldowns to drive performance.
Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column.
This report displays a number of links that enable drilldown access to additional details,
as described in the following table.
The Error Log Summary provides the following information:
Note: Some of the following fields do not appear in every Error Log Summary. Each of the three report
types—Client, Server, Policy—contains only the fields that make sense for its group.
Server The server is the system that is managing the storage devices.
Client The system that was backed up.

IP Address The IP address of the client, shown only in the Error Log Summary By Client report.
Policy If you selected Group By Policy through the Report Designer, the policy name
appears in this column. This column does not appear if you selected Group By
Management Server.
Backup Product Indicates the backup software running on the server where the error occurred. Refer
to that product’s documentation to correlate the error code to diagnose problems.
HP Data Protector
Legato Networker
Symantec Backup Exec
NetBackup
Tivoli Storage Manager
Error Code Numeric code reported by the backup product. Refer to the backup product’s
reference guides for troubleshooting advice.
Error Each row in the table displays the number of occurrences for each error code within
Occurrences the report’s selected time frame.
Click on any error occurrence to go to the Job Summary report, which lists the events
that correspond to that particular error code.
Last Error Date Click on the Last Error Date to go to the Job Summary report, which displays the
most recent error events only, including skipped files.
Error Code Each row in the table includes a detailed error description that provides you with
Description valuable information. Since the data is derived from backup job error logs, this
description is backup-product dependent.
Error Log Summary 129

Consecutive Errors By Client
Backup Manager > Management Reports> Consecutive Errors by Client
Use this report to proactively manage clients and servers. Consecutive errors may
portend hardware reliability issues. Using this report you can identify not only
consecutive errors, but also the number of consecutive days that the errors persisted.
The default order for this listing is descending order, with the clients having the most
consecutive errors listed first. Correlate the number of consecutive errors with the
number of consecutive days so that you can disregard errors that appear to be
intermittent.
Note: Click on any of the column headings to sort the table by column.
The Consecutive Errors by Client report provides the following information:
Client Name The client is the system that is being backed up.
IP Address Client’s IP address on the LAN.
Server Name The server is the system that is managing the storage devices. Click on any server
name to link to the Server Details page, which provides you comprehensive
information about that server. Then, from the Server Details page, click on the
Server Group link to determine the server groups to which this server belongs.
# of Consecutive # of consecutive errors logged within the designated time frame.
Errors Click on the number to launch the related Job Summary report where you’ll find a
detailed listed of the errors.

# of Consecutive # of days in which the client’s consecutive errors were logged.
Days
First/Last Error Date of the first and last errors, within the specified time frame, gleaned from logs.
Dates The range between the first and last error dates gives some insight into the severity
of the problem. Click on each of the error dates to generate two separate Job
Summary reports so that you can compare the snapshots of the start and end of the
error events.
Consecutive Errors By Client 131

Largest Backup Volume
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Largest Backup Volume
Use this report to identify consumers of your most utilized backup volume. A pie chart
graphically represents the usage that also is listed in the legend. This report will help
you identify greedy servers or applications.
Click the server links in the legend to drill down to details.
The Largest Backup Volume is a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup
consumers within the report scope.
• Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections a pop-up will display pertinent server
consumption details.
• Click on any section of the pie chart to view the Server Consumption Summary report for that
particular server.

Monthly Backup Summary
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Monthly Backup Summary
or
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Data Protection Dashboard
Client Clicking the server name will point you to the Server Details report which provides
Server detailed information regarding the server, including but not limited to: IP Address, ID
Number, Make, Model, OS, and Server Group Membership.
Total The total backup jobs that ran for the associated client server
Backups
MBytes The amount of data backed up for the client server
Last The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent
Backup backup event for each server in their server group. Clicking on the link will take you to the
Job Details report where you can view backup details
Last Full The Monthly Backup Summary provides you with the date and time of the most recent full
Backup backup event for each server in the chosen server group. Clicking on the link will take you
to the Job Details report where you can view backup details regarding the full backup,
including but not limited to: Job Type, Exit Status, Status Description, # of Tapes, Tape ID
#s, and # of Files.
Monthly Backup Summary 133

Job Summary By Server
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Job Summary By Server
This report displays the number of jobs and their status, for jobs started during the time
period that you specified for the report.
Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report requires a
homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all Legato servers
in your scope selection.
Correlate the data in this report with the information in the Real Time Library and Drive
Status to determine if there are problems with the server. For example, if the Job
Summary By Server shows jobs in the queue and the Real Time Library and Drive
Status shows available drives, something is preventing the queued jobs from getting to
running status.
Note: The report for Legato servers is titled, Real Time Save Set Summary.
Server The backup management server.

Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a storage unit. this
value is the total current running jobs and is not constrained by the selected
report time period scope.
Que Jobs that are queued for an available storage unit. This value is the total
currently queued jobs and it is not constrained by the selected report time
period scope.
1st Jobs that completed successfully on their first try.
2+ Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts.
Warnings Jobs that completed, but were partial jobs with one or more warnings.
Errors Jobs that completed, but a fatal error occurred.
Total Each numeric column is totalled at the bottom of the table.

Running and Queued Job Summary
Backup Manager > Management Reports > Running and Queued Job Summary
Note: Only NetBackup and NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the report
requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all
NetWorker servers in your server group scope selection. For NetWorker, this report is titled,
Running Save Sets Summary.
The Running and Queued Jobs Summary displays any job that was running or queued at
the time the management servers were polled.
Jobs that require attention (long-running, stalled, or slow jobs) will be highlighted in
red and moved to the top of the running and queued jobs list so that they are quickly
noted by administrators and handled appropriately. Each of these flagged jobs will be
accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the type of potential problem.
• clock - indicates a long running job (>= 12 hours).
• arrow / barrier - indicates a stalled job (no write activity for >= 15 minutes)
• snail - indicates and slow running job (kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)
Running and Queued Job Summary 135

NetBackup Running and Queued Jobs Summary
Server Enables drill down access to the server details
Client Drill down to Client details
Policy Name The name of the backup policy associated with the job
Job ID The NetBackup job ID
Try (MB) Amount of data attempting to be backed up
Try Start Date Date of the attempted backup
Duration The length of the backup job
KB/Sec Transfer rate
Last Written The date and time of the last write.
Indicators Indicator icons indicate long-running, stalled, or slow-running jobs:
clock = long running job (>= 12 hours); arrow / barrier = stalled job
(no write activity for >= 15 minutes); snail = slow running job
(kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)
NetWorker Running Save Sets Summary

Server Enables drill down access to the server details
Client/Group Drill down to Client details
Save Set ID The NetWorker Save Set ID
Duration The length of the backup job
Indicators Indicator icons indicate long-running, stalled, or slow-running jobs:
clock = long running job (>= 12 hours); arrow / barrier = stalled job
(no write activity for >= 15 minutes); snail = slow running job
(kilobytes per second throughput <= 200 Kb/sec)

HP Data Protector Session Summary
Backup Manager > Management Reports > HP DP Session Summary
The Session Summary report provides an overview of the HP Data Protector backup/
restore sessions.
Session Name Backup/restore session name—links to the HP Data Protector

Session Details report
Event Type unknown, backup, restore
Backup Type incremental, differential, transaction, full, or delta
Specification Name of the HP Data Protector backup specification
Start Time Backup/restore start time
End Time Backup/restore end time
Success Percentage % of backup/restore session that was successful
MB Amount of data backed up
Status Session Status: unknown, completed, completed/failures, or failed
Tapes The tapes used for the backup/restore session
HP Data Protector Session Summary 137

HP Data Protector Session Details
Backup Manager > Management Reports > HP DP Session Summary
Then, click on a Session Name.

The Session Details report provides details for HP Data Protector backup/restore
sessions.
Session Name Backup/restore session name

Backup Type incremental, differential, transaction, full, or delta
Success Percentage % of backup/restore session that was successful
Start Time Backup/restore start time
End Time Backup/restore end time
Cell Manager The name of the Cell Manager server links to the Server
Details.
# of Errors Indicates the number of session errors. These error messages
will be included in the Session Message table.
Specification The HP Data Protector backup specification links to the HP
Data Protector Backup Specification Summary.
User Name Session user name
MBytes Amount of data backed up by this session
# of Media The list of media associated with this session
Product Type HP Data Protector

Status Session Status: unknown, completed, completed/failures, or
failed
Group Name Group Name
Duration Length of the session
# of Warning Messages Indicates the number of session warning messages. If there are
any warning messages, they will be listed in the table below
the session details.
HP Data Protector Session Details 139

8
Backup Administration Reports

Chapter7

• Operations Dashboard
• Command Center Dashboard
• Data Protection Dashboard
• Message of the Day Report
• Server Details Report
• Server Group
• Mission Control Report
• Client Protection Summary
• TSM Storage Pools Dashboard
• Client Job Histogram
141
Operations Dashboard
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations Dashboard
The Operations Dashboard provides you with multiple views of your backup
environment on a single page.
1. Job Status
Summary
2. Current
Media
Summary
3. Largest
Backup
Volume
Report
4. Storage
Unit
Status
Job Status Displays the number of successful, warning and error events for each time period.
Summary The dashed yellow line displays the SLA success goal while the triangle symbols
track actual achievement for each day.
Clicking on any of the bars will take you to the Job Summary Report for the
corresponding event status and time frame.
Current Media Provides a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the servers within the
Summary report scope.
Mouse-over any of the pie-chart sections to display pop-ups that provide pertinent
details about the media of the corresponding status.
Click on any section of the pie-chart or the to go to the Tape Media Summary report
for all media with the corresponding status.
Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all
the servers within the report scope.

Largest Backup Provides a real-time snapshot of the largest server backup consumers within the
Volume Report report scope.
Mouse-over any of the bars or symbols on the chart to display pop-ups that provide
details.
Click on any section of the pie-chart to go to the Server Consumption Summary
Report for a particular server.
Click on the Total Servers link to go to the Server Consumption Summary report for
all the servers within the report scope.
Storage Unit Each file system is identified by the file system path, with its management server
Status displayed above the file system graphic. The total number of Storage Units sharing
the same file system is also shown. The display of this report is dependent on the
backup products in your environment and the report scope.
Each file system is accompanied by a thermometer, which indicates the percentage

of space occupied and available on the file system. The Used value is as reported by
the operating system, and includes space occupied by all backup images as well as
any other files that may reside on that file system. The Free value also is reported by
the operating system.
Used and free values of Unknown indicate the Discovery module has not been
configured to probe the media servers’ file systems for their physical characteristics.
Operations Dashboard 143

Command Center Dashboard
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Command Center Dashboard
The Command Center Dashboard provides four portlets with a real-time view of your
backup environment.
Note: Only NetBackup and Legato jobs are supported for this dashboard. Also, the dashboard
requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all
Legato servers in your scope selection.
Job Displays the number of jobs and the job status for the time period that you selected in the
Summary report scope:
by Server
Server The backup management server.
Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a
storage unit. this value is the total current running jobs and is not
constrained by the selected report time period scope.
Que Jobs that are queued for an available storage unit. This value is the
total currently queued jobs and it is not constrained by the
selected report time period scope.
1st Jobs that completed successfully on their first try.
2+ Jobs that completed successfully after two or more attempts.
Warnings Jobs that completed, but were partial jobs with one or more
warnings.
Errors Jobs that completed, but a fatal error occurred.
You can drill down on any non-zero value to view the Job Summary Report for those
corresponding jobs. Additionally, you can drill down further to the more comprehensive
Job Detail Report for any individual jobs listed in the summary.
Real Time Summarizes each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as
Library current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s) by the
and Drive Data Collector.
Status
Monitor the health of each library by tracking the number of drives up, down, in
use and available within each tape library. When the number of down drives in a
library is equal to or greater than 25%, the text for the library’s row is flagged in
red.

Real Time The Real Time Storage Unit Component displays current high-level information for each
Storage storage unit in your environment. Each storage unit listed provides you with several
Unit columns of pertinent information.
Utilization
Storage Unit The name of the unit.
Media Server Click this link to display the Server Details Report.
Type The type of unit, such as Disk, Disk Staging, Media Manager, or
NDMP (Network Data Management Protocol).
Total Drives The unit’s configuration.
Jobs Run Jobs that are currently running and have been assigned to a
storage unit. This value is the total current running jobs and is not
constrained by the selected report time period scope.
Max Drives Notes the maximum drives per job.
Max Multiplex/ The maximum number of concurrent drives.
Drives
The Drives Up column combined with the Jobs Queued and Jobs Running columns help
you determine whether a storage unit is functioning properly. For instance, if there are
jobs in the queue for a storage unit, and there are also drives available within a storage
unit, there may be something preventing the queued jobs from moving to the running
status.
Running Displays any job that was running or queued at the time the Data Collector last polled the
and management server(s).
Queued Click any Job ID # in the list to retrieve comprehensive detail about a specific job.
Jobs
Summary The total number of running jobs displayed on the dashboard is limited. If the number of
running and queued jobs exceeds the limit, all the running and queued jobs can be viewed
in a separate report by clicking the Total Running and Queued Jobs link.
The following jobs require attention, so the report highlights them in red and moves them
to the top of the running and queued jobs list. Each of these flagged jobs will be
accompanied by one or more icons to indicate the potential problem:
Clock Long >= 12 hours
Arrow/ <= 200 Kb/sec

Slow
barrier
Snail Stalled No write activity for >= 15 minutes
Long 12 hours
Slow <200 kilobytes per second
Stalled 1800 seconds (30 mins)
Command Center Dashboard 145

Data Protection Dashboard
To access this dashboard, in the Navigation pane select:
The Data Protection Dashboard contains the following reports:
• Message of the Day Report
• Job Status Summary
• Mission Control Report
• Monthly Backup Summary
In the Data Protection Dashboard Report Designer, in addition to specifying a time
period, you also can choose to omit backup retries.

Message of the Day Report
This report provides a starting point for handling issues that require immediate
attention. Specifically, it lists the failed backups and restores per server. From these
lists, you can drill down to the Server Details Report, the Job Summary Report, and the
Mission Control Report.
Drill down for additional details:
1. To access the Server Details Report, click a link under the Server column.
2. To access Job Summary reports, click a Finish Date link.
Message of the Day Report 147

Server Details Report
This report can be accessed from numerous reports via either Client or Server name
links, such as:
• Job Summary Report
• Consecutive Errors by Client
• Disk Usage and Performance
• Billing and Chargeback Summary
• Server Group listings
Click the server name to go to the Server Details screen for additional information.
Note: The output is specific to the server type, as shown in the following examples.
Host Aliases
Some servers also may show a list of host aliases in this Server Details report:

Edit Server Details
IP Address The server’s IP address
Location Server location, as supplied by the System Administrator
Make Vendor name, such as IBM or Sun
Model The product’s alphanumeric identifier
OS The specific version of the operating system, such as Solaris 9
Server Details Report 149

Server Group Click a group link to access the Server Group listing.
Membership
The filespace section at the bottom of this report provides the
following data (for TSM only):
• Node
• Filespace
Filespaces
• Capacity
• Free
• Volumes: Click links to access specific volumes.
• Storage Pool

Server Group
This report can be accessed from the Server Details Report. In the Server Details
Report, click a Group Member link to list the clients/servers belonging to that server
group.
The Server Group table provides the following information. Note that the columns that
are shown may vary, depending on the type of server group:
Client Link to the Server Details Report.
Server Link to the Server Details Report for the backup server.
Last Backup Link to the Job Summary Report.
Backups this month The number of the client’s backups for the month.
Total Available (MB) Amount of available space on this client

The server’s capacity, if it can be determined. In the case of
Capacity (MB) backup clients, the capacity may be unknown to
StorageConsole.
Backup Product The backup software that performed the backups.
Node For TSM servers, the node name
Server Group 151

Mission Control Report
or
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Mission Control
The Mission Control report provides you with a comprehensive snapshot of your
backup and restore event status. Using this report, you can easily identify servers that
have had no backups or failed backups. And, you can drilldown to ascertain the root
cause of unsuccessful backups. Organizations use this report to ensure Sarbanes-Oxley
compliance, as it shows ultimate backup success over time.
When you generate this report, the Report Designer prompts you to select scope
parameters, including the options to Ignore Retries and also to Exclude Clients with
Successful Backups. If the “Exclude Clients with Successful Backups” checkbox was
checked in the Report Designer, only clients with at least one “No Jobs” or “Failed”
indicator will be shown. Note that if the last column corresponds to the current day and
the indicator is “No Jobs” and all other indicators for the row are successful, the row
will be considered a “success” and therefore will be excluded from the report.

1. Event
Status
2. Current
Date
Range
3. Status
Indicators
Note: A row can be expanded to list underlying details for NetBackup, Legato, and HP Data
Protector servers. For Tivoli Storage Manager and Backup Exec, an expansion arrow will not be
available. Also, the Flashback policy type (used for VM backups) is not supported; however, an
expansion arrow may be displayed, with no underlying details available.
Event Status Displays a row for each server within the report scope. Click on any server name in
the list to go to the Server Details page for that server.
Some servers will have an arrow next to it, which can be used to expand the server to
show the underlying file systems.
Current Date The date range that is currently displayed in the report is always listed at the top of
Range the report. If the date range is beyond the current day, or before your backup
environment data started being pushed to the Reporting Database, the event
indicator will be “No Jobs.”
Mission Control Report 153

Status Indicators Each day column for every server contains an event status indicator with the
following color codes. The indicator always reflects the most serious status if there
is more than one event for that server on that day. For example, if there are three
successful events and one failure, the indicator will be red.
Blue Successful events
Yellow Warning events
Red Failed events
Click on any of the indicators to go to the Job Summary Report for all events
associated with that server on that day. Once in the Job Summary Report, you can
drilldown to Job Details and even add a note to indicate the strategy for resolving an
issue—thus, providing an audit trail.
Tailoring the Report Output by Backup Product

In the Report Designer, click Advanced.
Note that the options available in this window depend on the backup product data
collection options that have been enabled for your Portal.

Client Protection Summary
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Protection Summary
Note: The Client Protection Summary is available only if you have purchased the optional add-
on Discovery module. This report is NetBackup-specific.
With the Discovery module, you can use the Client Protection Report Designer to
customize and personalize a Client Protection Summary that will identify exposure and
threats to an enterprise data protection environment.
The Client Protection Report provides a single-pane view of the protection status for the
list of clients or servers. This is a tabular report with the following columns:
Client Protection Summary 155

Clients and Lists all clients and devices in the scope of the report along with their key
File attributes:
Systems
The name of the client or device as returned by the backup software or
a dns lookup of the IP address. If the name is not returned by DNS, the
report displays the IP address. Click on the client to view the Client
Client Details. If the discovery process is unable to resolve the name of a
client, the IP address will be displayed. To prevent unresolved clients
from appearing in the report, clear the Show unresolved hosts check
box in the Report Designer.
OS Type The operating system type returned by the discovery process.
Backup Currently, only NetBackup is detected.

Product
Drives or file systems uncovered by the discovery process—for
Device
example, C:\, /export, and /.
Active Full: The client is completely protected—that is, an active policy exists that references the
Coverage complete drive or file system as an include path. For example, the file system /home is
referenced as an include path in the policy Unix_servers_home.
Partial: No active policies exist that reference the complete drive or file system. However,
one or more active policies exist that reference a subset of the drive or file system as an
include path. For example, for the file system /home, the include path /home/fred is
referenced in an active policy.
None: There are no active policies that reference either the entire or any subset of the
drive or file system.
Unknown: The coverage level is unknown. Typically, this level is displayed if NetBackup
is not detected on the client.
Protection Blue: Successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report
Status period and one or more active policies provide FULL coverage as defined above;
Yellow: Successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report
period, but the active policies only provide PARTIAL coverage.
Red: No successful full backup for the device or file system occurred within the report
period. Coverage level is irrelevant.
White: The protection status and coverage level is unknown. Typically this status is
displayed if NetBackup is not detected on the client.
Last Lists the date and time of the last successful and last attempted FULL backups for the
Backups drive or file system.
Covering Displays the backup policy name, if the drive or file system contains one or more policies.
Policies Click on an individual policy to view the policy details.
Exclude Select the Exclude check box to exclude specific clients, devices, or file systems from the
From report. The selected items no longer appear in subsequent reports. To subsequently
Report include/exclude clients, file systems, and unresolved hosts, use the check boxes in the
Report Designer: Show excluded clients, Show excluded File Systems, Show unresolved
hosts, and Expand All Clients.

TSM Storage Pools Dashboard
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > TSM Storage Pools Dashboard
The TSM Storage Pools Dashboard provides a real-time view into capacity and process
status information for the selected list of TSM Storage Pools. In a single pane, you
quickly can analyze capacity and process status information for each of the Storage
Pools.
Storage Pool Capacity

The pie chart displays the percentage and GBytes used and available for the Storage Pool. The
GBytes Used is calculated by multiplying the percentage used by the estimated capacity of the
Storage Pool.
Storage Pool Attributes
Server Backup Server name
Type Primary, Copy
Device Type Sequential, Random
Access Type Read/Write, Read only

TSM can reclaim volumes that exceed a reclamation threshold—that
Reclaim
is, a percentage of unused space on the volume. This threshold value is
Threshold
set by the TSM administrator, within TSM.
TSM Storage Pools Dashboard 157

The storage pool that is next in line for backups when the current pool
Next Storage Pool reaches capacity—that is, the destination storage pool for migrated
data. TSM automatically requests a storage pool when needed.
The maximum amount of scratch space allocated to the storage pool.
When the number of scratch volumes that TSM is using for the storage
Max Scratch
pool exceeds the maximum number of scratch volumes specified, the
storage pool can run out of space.
Capacity (GB) Storage pool capacity
% Utilized Percentage used
% Migrated Estimated percentage of storage that can be migrated

The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage
Low Mig % indicates when the server should stop migrating files to the next
available storage pool.
The value used by TSM to start/stop migration. This percentage
High Mig % indicates when the server should start migrating files to the next
available storage pool.
Max Size (MB) The maximum size of the storage pool.
Storage Pool Utilization

This is a historical tracking bar chart that displays the history of used and available
capacity for the selected storage pool.
Tape Occupancy Summary

This pie chart displays a summary of the GBytes and number of tapes used by each
client/server that occupy this Storage Pool. The chart displays the top eight tape media
consumers of this Storage Pool. Click on any of the client/server names to view detailed
tape media consumption information
Tape Media Summary

This pie chart shows a summary of all the tapes assigned to this Storage Pool. This pie
chart displays both the percentage of tapes grouped by media status, and the number of
tapes grouped by media status:
• Filling
• Full
• Pending
• Empty
Storage Pool Process History

This historical tracking bar chart displays the summary status of any TSM process that
used this Storage Pool. Examples of TSM processes that are plotted on this bar chart
are: Storage Pool Backups, Migrations, Expirations, etc. Click on a bar in this graph to
view the TSM Process Summary.

TSM Process Summary
This report is accessed from the TSM Storage Pool Dashboard, by clicking a bar in a
Storage Pool Process History graph.
This report provides indicators of the type of job, as well as, the number of files and the
relevant tape IDs.
TSM Process Summary 159

Client Job Histogram
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Client Job Histogram
From the Client Job Histogram Report Designer, you can select one of the following
options:
• Job Throughput Histogram
• Job Activity Histogram
These reports provide hour-by-hour data for the previous 24-hour period.
Using these reports, you can identify bottlenecks and adjust your environment
accordingly.
Job Throughput Histogram

This report provides colored visual cues for quickly determining the backup throughput
trends for clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24 hours. This report shows
completed jobs that started within the selected time period. These jobs could have a
completion status of either successful or warning.
• Red - Indicates below average throughput—less than 5 MB/second
• Yellow - Indicates average throughput—greater than 5 MB/second and less than 9 MB/
second
• Blue - Indicates above average throughput—greater than 9 MB/second
Note: The breakdown is based on the average, not the mean throughput.

Job Activity Histogram
The Job Activity Histogram lists clients that had backup jobs within the previous 24
hours. The colored cells enable you to quickly determine the activity per client.
The report shows the number of completed jobs that started within the selected time
period. These jobs could have a completion status of: successful, failed, or warning.
Client Job Histogram 161

9
Media Management Reports

Chapter7

• Current Media Summary
• Tape Media Summary Report
• Tape Media Detail Report
• HP Data Protector Tape Media Table
• NetBackup Tape Media Table
• NetWorker Tape Media Table
• TSM Tape Media Table
Using Media Management Reports

The reports in this menu group enable you to manage your backup media inventory.
Use the Current Media Summary for an at-a-glance view of the status of the media
associated with each of your backup solutions. The pie charts and legends in this report
provide drilldown access to the Tape Media Summary report.
Using Media Management Reports 163

Current Media Summary
Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Current Media Summary
Note: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.
The Current Media Summary is a real-time snapshot of all the media utilized by the
backup solutions for servers within the scope of the report. The status types vary for
each pie chart because they are directly related to the specific backup solution. So, for
example, NetBackup reports expired tapes, while NetWorker indicates which tapes can
be recycled. Refer to the backup solution’s reference guides for details about media
status types.
• Hold your mouse over any of the pie chart sections and a pop-up will display details about
the media of the corresponding status. Similar information is reflected in the chart legend.
• Click on any section of the pie chart and/or legend labels to view the Tape Media Summary
report.
• Click on the Total Tape Media link to view the Tape Media Summary report.

Tape Media Summary Report
Backup Manager > Media Management Reports > Tape Media Summary
You also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the Total
Tape Media link in the Current Media Summary.
Note: This report does not display Backup Exec media data.
Depending on your environment, this report listing can get rather long, so you may
want to narrow the report’s scope. When you generate the report, you can limit the
output using the following parameter choices:
• Scope: Select specific servers and/or server groups
• Event Status: Select All Media, Media Inside Tape Library, or Media Outside Tape Library
• Media Status: All, Expired, Available, In Use, or Full
When your Tape Media Summary report contains multiple listings, the sortable headings enable
you to find the tape media you want quickly. Click on any of the table headings to sort the table
by that heading in ascending order. Click the heading a second time to sort in descending order.
Media ID The tape ID links to the Tape Media Detail

Server The management Server links to the Server Details
Product The backup product associated with the tape: HP Data Protector,
NetBackup, NetWorker, TSM
Status The tape media status is reported as: Cleaning, Filling, Full,
Unavailable, or Vendor Specific (which indicates the disposition
specific to the backup product). Place your mouse pointer on top of
Vendor Specific to view the message.
Type Type of tape device
Library Library to which the tape belongs
Slot # Physical position in the library
Tape Media Summary Report 165

Tape Media Detail Report
The Tape Media Detail can be accessed from the Tape Media Summary Report by
clicking on the Media or Volume ID.
The details displayed in a Tape Media Detail report are specific to the backup vendor,
although some fields are common to all backup products. At the bottom of the Tape
Media Detail report, a table lists additional backup event details by node name, session
name, or save set—depending on the structure and terminology of the corresponding
backup product. These tables are listed by backup product in this section.
Media ID/ Either the Media ID or Volume ID

Volume ID
Label The tape label
Type/ The type of tape media, such as DLT or LTO-Ultrium
Media Type
Product The backup product using the tape media
Status Tape status, such as Scratch, Good, Full, Filling, as reported by the
backup software
Policy HP Data Protector policy
Usage The type of usage allocation
Allocation
Error State The tape media error state, as reported by the backup software
Access Type Access type, such as Read Write or Read Only, as reported by the
backup software
Server The server managing the job that’s transferring the data to tape
Volume Group NetBackup volume group
Volume Pool NetBackup volume pool
Storage Pool TSM only: Lists the associated Storage Pool
Device Class TSM only: Lists the device class of the tape media
Tape Library The name of the library in which the media resides

Slot Number The media’s location in the library
Estimated Total See the Estimated Capacity Notes in the User’s Guide and the
MB Capacity context-sensitive help.
% Utilized For TSM, the percentage of the media that is in use

% Reclaimable For TSM, the percentage of the media that may be reclaimable
Written MBytes The amount of data written to the media. This field is not displayed
for TSM.
Available The amount of available space on the media. This field is not
MBytes/ displayed for TSM.
Estimated
MBytes
Available See Estimated Capacity Notes.
Number of Number of times the media was mounted

Mounts
Number of Number of media write errors
Write Errors
Number of Read Number of media read errors
Errors
Age Limit HP Data Protector age limit
(months)
Initialized Date HP Data Protector initialized date
Last Read Date & time of last read
Last Written Date & time of last write
Last Updated Date & time of last update
Last Overwrite Date & time of last overwrite
Date
HP Data Protector Tape Media Table

This table is displayed for reports that have an HP Data Protector server group scope.
For a description of the fields in this table, see “HP Data Protector Session Summary”
on page 137.
NetBackup Tape Media Table

The following table is displayed for reports that have a NetBackup server group scope.
Backup ID The NetBackup ID

Client Client from which the data was copied
Backup Type Type of backup to tape, such as Full or Partial
Start Time Date and time the backup to tape began
Finish Time Date and time the backup to tape ended
Tape Media Detail Report 167

Expiration Expiration date, if any
Written Amount of data written to tape for this session
MBytes
Exit Code Exit code associated with the backup job
NetWorker Tape Media Table

The following table is displayed for reports that have a NetWorker server group scope.
Save Set NetWorker Save Set name

Client Client from which the data was copied
Level Type of tape media storage, which could be a level number or text, such
as Full
Start Time Start of Save Set write
Finish Time End of Save Set write
Expiration Expiration date, if any
Written Amount of data written to the tape
MBytes
State Tape media state, such as Browsable or Recoverable
TSM Tape Media Table

The following table is displayed for reports that have a TSM server group scope.
Node Name Name of the TSM node/server

File Space Name of the TSM file space that was copied to tape
Name
Copy Type Type of transfer to tape
Storage Pool The TSM Storage Pool name
# of Files in Number of files in the TSM storage pool for this node
Stg Pool
Stg Pool Phy Amount of data in the TSM storage pool for this node
MBytes
Stg Pool Log Size of the TSM storage pool log file
MBytes
Estimated Capacity Notes

Every time tape data is captured, StorageConsole recalculates the estimated tape
capacity for the tape media type and volume pool combination. It takes into
consideration the written KBs for the media type and volume pool for full tapes and
then stores the average as the estimated tape capacity. Initially, when there is not enough
data captured, this value may look low compared to the capacity stated by the vendor.

Over time, the estimated capacity improves to the actual number of KBs that is being
written to the tapes. Note that the amount of data that fits on the tapes differs based on
the compression algorithm used and the type of data that is being backed up, which
results in different compression ratios.
For NetBackup, some environments freeze or suspend their media and do not allow
their tapes to fill to capacity. In this situation, a StorageConsole database table can be
updated to override the standard estimated capacity calculation with values for Volume
Pool ID, Media Type, and Estimated Capacity. When values are supplied in this table,
the NetBackup estimated capacity calculations will first determine the average size of
full tapes—by tape type and volume pool. If this value is less than the value provided in
the table, the value in the table will be used for the estimated capacity.
Refer to the System Administrator’s Guide for details.
Tape Media Detail Report 169

10
Backup SLA Reports

Chapter7

• Available SLA Reports
Backup Start Time Performance
• Backup Start Time SLA Report
• Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance
Backup Success Performance
• Backup Status SLA Report
• Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance
Backup Duration Performance
• Backup Duration SLA Report
• Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance
171
Available SLA Reports
Whether you’re an Administrator in an IT department or an Administrator at a Data
Center, you commit a specific level of service to your end-users or customers.
Use default SLA reports or create custom reports to provide information that
determines if you are satisfying the commitments you made to your users or customers.
With access to the Reporting Database, you can configure the metrics upon which the
reports are based. Service Level Agreements (SLAs) are typically based on the
following metrics:
• Backup Start Time Performance
• Backup Status Performance
• Backup Duration Performance
The reports can provide data to fine-tune your SLA and to determine if you’re meeting
your commitments. The more detailed your SLAs, the easier it is to cut costs, in the case
of an IT department, or provide competitive SLA pricing, in the case of Data Centers.
Refer to the following SLA reports:

• Backup Start Time
• Backup Status
• Backup Duration

Backup Start Time SLA Report
Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Start Time SLA
The Backup Start Time SLA report displays the total number of backups that began
within a specific time range of their scheduled start time.
Note: This report can be used only for NetBackup, Backup Exec, and TSM start time SLAs.
Use this report to determine what proportion of backups started at their scheduled time,
or were delayed and by how long. If jobs are consistently missing their targeted start
times, you may need to investigate the feasibility of your current schedule. A delay
could be the result of other jobs taking too long or possibly because there are no drives
available. To anticipate delays as a result of drive availability, consider using the
“Backup Manager Forecasting Reports” on page 199.
To determine and improve backup start time performance, see Determining and
Improving Backup Start Time Performance.
Backup Start Time SLA Report 173

Determining and Improving Backup Start Time Performance
Use the Backup Start Time SLA report to gauge your backup efficiency. The Backup
Start Time SLA report consists of a bar chart that provides a visual indicator of how long
backups take to complete. Backup completion time is measured in days.
After you use this chart to identify the backups that represent poor performance, you
can drill down to determine the causes so that you can prevent inefficiencies in the
future. Your SLA determines what values represent poor performance vs. excellent
performance. However, if you don’t currently have an SLA implemented, strive for
Good (31-60 minutes) performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor
performance.
To determine and improve backup start time performance:
1. Go to the Backup Start Time SLA Report.

2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graph’s y-axis or hold your cursor
over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups. Each segment represents
100% of the overall jobs for the day.
Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no
backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the
Reporting Database were not installed at that time.
3. Identify the poorly performing jobs and the reasons for the poor performance:
a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance as defined by
your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. As a general guideline, the Backup Start
Time SLA report provides a few metrics:
Metric Performance
Started Within 30 minutes Excellent
Started Within 31-60 minutes Good
Started Within 61-120 minutes Average
Started After 120 minutes Poor
Table 10.1 Performance Metrics
b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing
backup jobs associated with a particular server?
4. Implement solutions to increase backup start time performance, such as:
• Reduce the number of tape mounts.
• Increase network speed.
• Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors with faster processors.
• Increase hard drive speed and size.

Backup Status SLA Report
Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Status SLA
Use the Backup Status SLA report to determine backup success performance and to
identify backup failures. A typical backup success percentage might be 85%, as
indicated by the Successful Backups Goal line shown in the bar chart.
Changing the Success Percentage

If you want to change the success percentage metric, refer to Defining Report Metrics in
the APTARE StorageConsole System Administrator’s Guide. To change the percentage,
you must have permission to write to the Reporting Database.
To determine and improve backup success performance, go to Determining and
Improving Backup Success Performance.
Backup Status SLA Report 175

Determining and Improving Backup Success Performance
The Backup Status SLA report provides you the ability to drill down into any failed job
so that you can identify the cause of the failure. In addition to walking you through this
identification process, this procedure provides a checklist to help you improve your
backup success performance.
To determine and improve backup success performance:
1. Go to the Backup Status SLA Report.

2. For each day, week, or month, hold your cursor over the triangle icon at the top of each bar
to display the success rate. Compare this rate against your SLA.
Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then no backup jobs
ran that day.
3. Use the chart to identify any jobs that failed.
4. Identify any trends between failed jobs. For example, are the failed jobs associated with a
particular tape drive or disk drive?

Backup Duration SLA Report
Backup Manager > SLA Reports > Backup Duration SLA
The Backup Duration SLA report displays the total number of backups that completed
within the specific time range.
As you are generating your Backup Duration SLA report, consider the following best
practices:
• Use a consistent duration so that you can develop and compare data across the same interval.
• Create a duration report for each business unit or for each customer. Depending on how your
company stores data, the Administrator can set up server groups for each business unit
• If you have different SLAs with different groups of users or customers, create a unique report
for each SLA so that the data doesn’t become skewed. Even if you have the same SLA for all
users or customers, consider generating a unique report so that you can share backup duration
performance data that is specific to their jobs.
To determine and improve backup duration performance, go to Determining and
Improving Backup Duration Performance.
Backup Duration SLA Report 177

Determining and Improving Backup Duration Performance
Use the Backup Duration SLA report to gauge your backup environment’s efficiency.
The Backup Duration SLA report consists of a bar chart. Backup completion time is
measured in days.
Many backups run for a long time simply because they work with large amounts of
data, not because of poor backup duration performance. However, sometimes a job with
poor performance might be the result of a faulty tape drive that causes slow write
speeds.
After you use this Backup Duration SLA chart to identify the backups that represent
poor duration performance, you can drill down to determine if there is a problem. Your
service level agreement determines what values represent poor performance. However,
if you don’t currently have an SLA implemented, strive for Good (61-120 minutes)
performance by improving backup jobs with Average to Poor performance.
The Backup Duration SLA report provides the following metrics:
Metric Performance
Completed Within 60 minutes Excellent
Completed Within 61-120 minutes Good
Completed Within 121-300 minutes Average
Completed After 301+ minutes Poor
Table 10.2 Performance Metrics
To determine and improve backup duration performance:
1. Go to the Backup Duration SLA Report.

2. For each day, observe the number of backups in the bar graph’s y-axis or hold your cursor
over the color-coded segments to display the number of backups.
Each bar represents a specific day. If no bar appears for a specific day, then either no
backup jobs ran that day or no data is available because the Data Collector and the
Reporting Database were not installed at that time.
3. Identify poorly performing jobs:
a. Click on the color-coded bar segments that represent poor performance, as defined by
your SLA, drilling down into the actual jobs. Each segment represents a 100% of the
overall jobs for the day.
b. Identify any trends between backup jobs. For example, are the poorly performing
backup jobs taking place at a particular time?
4. Implement solutions to increase backup performance, such as:
• Back up during a less busy time.
• Increase network speed.
• Add additional processors or upgrade existing processors.

11
Backup Storage Utilization Reports

Chapter10

• Using Storage Utilization Reports
• Disk Usage and Performance Report
• Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report
• Drive Utilization and Performance Report
• Drive Performance Summary Report
• TSM Database Utilization
• Storage Unit Summary
• Storage Unit Detail Report
• Storage Unit Event Details
• Real Time Library and Drive Status
179
Using Storage Utilization Reports
To optimize storage utilization and performance, you can:
• Identify duplicate backups.
• Identify free capacity.
• Ensure maximum disk utilization throughput.
• Ensure that jobs start on time.
• Forecast future storage needs.
A number of practices contribute to storage consumption issues, such as over-
provisioning storage and neglecting to deallocate resources. Your data protection
strategy should include proactive procedures for reclaiming unused storage. The Portal
provides reports to assist you in optimizing storage utilization and performance.

Disk Usage and Performance Report
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Disk Usage & Performance
Note: This report is a NetBackup-only report.
Storage Unit The name of the storage unit.

Details
Mgmt Server Click on the Management Server name link to go to the corresponding Server
Details Details Report.
Media Server Click on the Media Server name link to go to the corresponding Server Details
Details page.
Storage Unit Each storage unit has an associated pathname that determines where the backups
File System are stored. The report shows both the pathname and the actual file system on
Info which the storage unit resides. If more than one storage unit shares the same file
system, the report lists the names of the other storage units.
It’s important to know if other storage units share the same file system, since any
physical free space on the file system will be shared as one common pool by all the
storage units for that file system.
Note: The File System Capacity (MB) field is populated only if Discovery has
been enabled.
Disk Usage and Performance Report 181

Real-Time Shows the amount of data on the Storage Unit for the selected report scope,
Storage grouped by expiration period.
Consumption Mouse-over the pie slices to view the total number of backups associated with the
amount of allocated storage.
Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list
of all the active backups that fall within the expiration period and are within the
report scope.
Backup Each bar in this graph represents the total number of GBytes written to the Storage
Volume & Unit for backups jobs that completed during the period represented by the bar.
Throughput Click on a bar to go to the Storage Unit Details Report, which displays a list of all
the backups represented by the bar.
The dotted line plotted against the secondary y-axis represents the Average
Throughput of the backups for the period represented by each bar. The calculation
only includes those jobs within the current report scope. The throughput is
calculated as follows:
backup volume/(sum of all backup durations in seconds)
Total Disk Each bar in this graph represents the total amount of space in GBytes occupied by
Usage unexpired backups.

Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Tape Library & Drive Utilization
The Tape Library and Drive Utilization report displays the average drive utilization
against the actual drive utilization for any given time period. Often, this report is used to
justify VTL purchases. Identify how many tape drives are writing and for how long. In
addition, the Drive Utilization and Performance Report provides insight into the
throughput, with drilldowns to drive performance.
This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.
1. Library
Utilization
2. Drillable
Stacked Bar
Chart
3. Pop-up Details
Library At the top of each chart, a summary of the library utilization provides a context for the bar
Utilization chart.
Drillable Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized stacked
Stacked against the actual utilization time. Clicking on any of the bar sections will take you to a
Bar Chart Backup Events Report.
Pop-up Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to launch pop-ups of details.
Details
Tape Library and Drive Utilization Report 183

Storage Unit Detail Report
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit Detail
You also can access this report from the Operations Dashboard by clicking on the File
Systems link.
Backup Manager > Administration Reports > Operations Dashboard
The Storage Unit Detail report provides a comprehensive view of all tape media in each
tape library, groups of tape media outside the libraries, and capacity and usage
information for disk storage unit file systems.
Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.
Figure 11.1 Example of the Storage Unit Detail Report
Tape Library Click on a Library name link or the icon to go to the Tape Media
Summary report for all media inside the library. In addition, various
usage links launch the Tape Media Summary.
Each library is accompanied by a media alert thermometer whose color
is an indicator of the percentage of GByte availability for all media in
the library:
Green More than 50% available.
Yellow Less than 50% available.
Red Less than 25% available.
Volume Displays each library or group of tapes outside the library, and each has
Group its own volume group. The media availability for the volume group is
represented by a color coded thermometer so it is easy to tell whether
there is a healthy amount of media GBytes available for future backups.

Scratch Pool If there is a designated scratch pool for a Tape Library or Group of
Media Usage Tapes Outside the Library, the report display the scratch pool as a
feeder pool to the Volume Pools. Each scratch pool is accompanied by
a color-coded scratch pool thermometer that indicates the amount of
scratch media available. The value represented is a percentage: the
capacity of the scratch media compared to the capacity all media in the
library.
Volume Pools When there is a designated scratch pool, this displays all volume pools
in that library that are fed by the scratch pool. Otherwise, the general
pool is shown. Click on the number of tapes to view the Tape Media
Summary report.
Volume Pool Displays one or more volume pools, depending on how many exist in
Usage the library. Each volume pool has a pie chart that shows the % GBytes
Free compared to the % GBytes Used. Click on any part of the pie chart
or the Free and Used values to go to the Tape Media Summary report
for that tape library.
File System Displays details about the disk space of the media server’s file system
on which the disk storage units reside. The operating system reports this
data.
Values of Unknown indicate that the Discovery module is not
configured to probe the media servers’ file systems for their physical
characteristics.
The management server and controlling server also are shown with the
file system details.
Storage Unit Shows the active backups on the Storage Unit grouped by expiration
Usage period. Click on a pie slice to go to the Storage Unit Event Details,
which displays a list of all the active backups within the particular
expiration period.
Storage Unit Detail Report 185

Storage Unit Event Details
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit Detail
Then, in the file system section of the report, click on a pie slice or pie chart legend link.
Backup ID Links to the Job Details.
Client Links to the Server Details.
Start Time When the backup job started.
Finish Time Links to the Job Details.
Expiration Date and time of the tape media expiration.
MBytes Amount of data written to the Storage Unit.
# of Files Number of files written.
Exit Code Status of the backup job.

Drive Utilization and Performance Report
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Utilization & Performance
The Drive Utilization and Performance report enables you to view and compare
utilization and performance of the tape drives in your environment. By viewing the total
aggregate throughput per drive, you can use this information to help you tune your
backup policies.
Note: This report does not display data from HP Data Protector or Symantec Backup Exec.
Avg KBytes/Sec and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an event
finish time took place. These calculations are available only for periods of time when an
event finished. So, if 20 events finish in one of the bar periods, the calculation is based
on the average write speed for the total time for all 20 jobs / total bytes written.
Likewise, using this example, Max speed would be the maximum of the averages of all
20 jobs.
The Portal does not tie into the hardware directly and monitor the actual drive write
speeds. Instead, the reports use the data that the Data Collector retrieved from the
backup software—including the amount of data written, job duration time, and job
completion time—for each job.
Drive Utilization and Performance Report 187

Drive For each drive, listed at the top of each Drive Utilization and Performance Chart:
Details • Drive Name
• Drive Type
• Tape Library Name
• Backup Management Server
Click on the Backup Management Server name to view its Server Details page.
Pop-up Mouse-over any chart bar or line symbol to view the corresponding values.
Details
Drive Click on the list at the bottom of each chart to go to the Drive Performance Summary
Summary Report, which lists all the backup events that took place on that drive for the time period
that you specified in the report scope.
Additionally, the min, max, and avg KBytes/Sec for the time period are provided at the
bottom of the report.
Avg & The Avg KBytes/Sec and Max KBytes/Sec is displayed for every bar during which an
Max event completed.
KBytes/Sec If the report shows a bar with utilization but does not have accompanying line symbols,
either no backups or restores completed during that time period or the drive was being
utilized for another purpose, such as copying a tape to be vaulted.
Local Start Each chart displays the utilization and performance of one drive in the system. The start
and End and end time for each chart is localized to the time zone where that drive’s management
Times server is located.
For example, if Drive A’s management server is located in the Pacific Standard Time
Zone and Drive B’s management server is located in the Eastern Standard Time Zone (3
hours ahead of Drive A’s management server) and you ran the Drive Utilization and
Performance Report for the last 12 hours, the Drive A chart’s start and end times would be
3 hours earlier than the chart for Drive B.
This start/end time localization enables real time performance comparison between drives,
even if they are located in different parts of the world.

Drive Performance Summary Report
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Performance Summary
This report also can be generated via a link in the Drive Utilization and Performance
Report.
This report provides high-level drive details for the reporting period that you specified
in the report scope.
Note: If you are accessing this report from the navigation pane, be sure to define a server group
scope that is unique by product type—for example, only NetBackup servers. Also, this report
does not display Symantec Backup Exec information.
Drive Name Links to the Drive Performance Detail.
Drive # Lists the drive number.
Drive Type The drive type label.
Drive Status The current status of the drive.
Library Name The name of the library.

Links to the controlling servers details in a Server Details
Controlling Server
Report.
Total MBytes used. A total for all drives is shown at the bottom
Total MBytes
of this column.
# of Backups The number of backups that used this drive.
Min MBytes/Sec These three values provide indicators of the drive’s

performance. The Maximum rate represents the fastest speed
Max MBytes/Sec that a job ran during the selected time frame. Likewise, the
Minimum rate represents the slowest speed that a job ran
Avg MBytes/Sec during the same time frame. For NetBackup specifics, see
NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.
As an alternative to Server Group scope, you can select Tape Libraries as the scope:
1. In the Drive Performance Summary Report Designer window, click Modify to change the
scope.
Drive Performance Summary Report 189

2. In the Client Selection window, first click Clear All to remove the server groups from the
“In scope” window.
3. Click the Tape Library tab to display the list of possible tape libraries in your
environment.
4. Double-click the tape libraries to include them in the scope and then click OK.

NetBackup Drive Performance Summary
For NetBackup jobs, the drive performance algorithm takes into account the use of
multiple tapes, as some backups require the dismounting and re-mounting of several
tapes. The Kilobytes/second rate is calculated for each piece of tape media used by the
backup job.
mediaKilobytes / ((finishReadWrite - startReadWrite) * SECS_IN_A_DAY *
(mediaKilobytes/jobKilobytes))
Where:
• mediaKilobytes is the total kilobytes written to an individual piece of tape media
• jobKilobytes is the total size of the backup job, as reported by bpdbjobs
• startReadWrite is the date/time that the job started writing to the tape
• finishReadWrite is the date/time that the job finished writing to the tape
The Drive Performance Summary report displays the minimum, average, and maximum
overall drive performance for all jobs for the reporting period. When you drill down to
an individual tape drive, the Drive Performance Detail Report uses this same algorithm
to display the performance of each job. If there are multiple rows for a single job, such
as when multiple tapes are used by the job, the performance metric is averaged across
all the rows returned from the above algorithm.
The details from which drive performance is derived can be viewed via drilldown links.
In the Drive Performance Detail report, click on the Finish Date for one of the backup
jobs to view the Job Details. At the bottom of the Job Details Report, the backup attempts
(try records) are displayed.
Drive Performance Summary Report 191

Drive Performance Detail
This report is the result of a drilldown from the Drive Performance Summary Report.
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Drive Performance Summary
Then, click on a Drive Name.
The drive name—this was the link to this report from the Drive
Drive Name
Performance Summary report.
Library Name The library name links to the Tape Media Summary report.
Client Links to the client’s Server Details Report.
Start Time When the backup job started.
Finish Time Links to the Job Details Report.
Duration Duration of the job.
Status Status of the job.
# of Files The number of files backed up to this drive.
MBytes Amount of data backed up to this drive.

For NetBackup, this value is calculated using the job write start
time and job write end time (not the job start time and job finish
MBytes/Sec time). For example, a job can start, but then it can wait in a
queue before the job begins to write to a tape/disk. That queue
time is eliminated in this calculation.
For NetBackup specifics, see NetBackup Drive Performance Summary.

TSM Database Utilization
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > TSM Database Utilization
The TSM Database Utilization report provides usage and capacity trending of the TSM
database. Using this report, you can determine how much of the allocated database
space has been used over the selected report period.
1. Drillable Stacked Bar Chart

2. Pop-up Details
3. Usage & Availability Trending
Drillable Each bar shows the average amount of time the library drive(s) are being utilized
Stacked stacked against the actual amount of utilization time. Click on any bar section will
Bar Chart to view the Backup Events Report.
Pop-up Mouse-over any of the bars on the chart to display pop-ups including the details of
Details that particular bar section.
Usage & Shows how much of the allocated database space has been utilized within the TSM
Availability database over the time period that you specified in the report scope.
Trending
TSM Database Utilization 193

TSM Recovery Log Utilization
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > TSM Recovery Log Utilization
This report displays TSM Recovery Log usage—both the maximum used and the
available capacity. The TSM Recovery Log contains transactions prior to TSM
committing them to the database. Use this report to monitor the size of the log to
prevent degradation on the TSM server.
The data can be displayed either as a bar chart or a tabular report. To select a report
type, click on Advanced in the Report Designer.

TSM Recovery Log Utilization 195
Storage Unit Summary
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Storage Unit Summary
This report is NetBackup-specific.
Note: Only the first four tape libraries are displayed.
Click on the library name or server to view the Storage Unit

Library Details
Detail Report.
File System Details Click on the server name to view the Server Details Report.

Real Time Library and Drive Status
Backup Manager > Storage Utilization Reports > Real Time Library and Drive
Status
Use this report to monitor the health of each library. This report displays current high-
level information for each tape library in your environment. The data will only be as
current as the time of the most recent poll of your management server(s).
Note: Only NetBackup and Legato NetWorker jobs are supported for this report. Also, the
report requires a homogeneous server scope—that is, choose either all NetBackup servers or all
Legato servers in your server group scope selection.
Library Library name.

Type The type of library, such as Optical or HCART.
Management Click this link to view server details.
Server
Slots The number of slots in the library.
Drives The number of drives in the library.
In Use Number of drives currently in use.
Drives Drives - In Use = Drives Available
Available
Down The number of disabled drives. When this number becomes equal to or greater
than 25% of the library’s drives, the library’s row of information will be
highlighted in red.
Avail % The percentage of drives in this library that are available.
Real Time Library and Drive Status 197

12
Backup Manager Forecasting Reports

Chapter11

• Forecasting Overview
• Media Forecasting Dashboard
• Media Availability Forecast
• Media Consumption Forecast
• Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report
• Scratch Pool Forecast Report
• NetBackup Library Capacity Forecast
Forecasting Overview
To ensure accurate forecasts, the reports make the following decisions:
• In order to provide a good statistical sample, when you select a display range, the report uses
historical data that is twice that display range.
• If the full range of historical data is unavailable, the data that is available is used. For
example, if you want to view data for January of the previous year to December of the
current year, the Portal looks for four years worth of historical data.
• Although the report forecasts the current period, the report ignores the current period when it
derives statistical calculations. For example, if the current month is July and you request to
view the report by months, the bar for July of this year will be forecasted and data for July of
this year will be ignored for statistical calculations.
Forecasting Overview 199

Media Forecasting Dashboard
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Forecasting
Dashboard
The Media Forecasting Dashboard displays 14 Days of historical consumption and 7
days of forecasted consumption. This report is NetBackup-specific. Using this
dashboard, you can pro-actively manage tape availability.
Media Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new
Consumption window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.
Forecast
The dark blue bars indicate historical consumption while the light blue bars indicate
consumption predicted for the next 7 days.
In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week
consumption data for the historical period that you specified in the report scope.
In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed each day, the system
calculates forecasted consumption by the close of each day using the following
algorithm:
1. Tally the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each
volume group.
2. Divide the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type by the
estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group.
Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope.
The chart displays the aggregate tape consumption results using the circular line
symbols.

details.
Drillable Bars Click on any historical consumption bar to drill down to the Media Usage Detail
Report for that day.
Media The Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted
Availability availability.
Forecast
Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new
window. A chart appears for each volume pool within the report scope.
In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed each day, the system
calculates forecasted consumption by the close of each day using the following
algorithm:
1. Tally the Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each
volume group.
2. Divide the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type by the
estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group.
Repeat for each volume group/media type instance within the report scope.
The system calculates the forecasted availability for the close of each day using the
following algorithm:
previous day’s availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption
Media The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day that the report
Availability displays. If the number of tapes available drops below the Availability Threshold, the
Alerts symbol is red. The default for the Availability Threshold is 25, but you can configure
this value for each portal instance.
Media Media Expiration is displayed on a by-Tape and by-GByte basis in the first two pie
Expiration By charts.
Tapes &
GBytes Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new
Mouse-over any pie slice to display pop-ups that provide display the data associated
with that slice.
Click on any of the pie slices or associated legend items to go to the Media Summary
report, which shows all the media that expires within the associated time frame. Each
piece of media is associated with the slot # as well as the expiration date so that you
can easily select and remove media from the library. Each of the Expiration Time
Frame Policies defaults to the following:
Expire <= 7 Days
Expire <= 30 Days
Expire <= 90 Days
Expire <= 180 Days
Expire > 180 Days
The Expiration Time Frame Policies are globally configurable parameters for each
portal instance.
Media Forecasting Dashboard 201

Real Time The pie chart provides a real-time snapshot of all the media that the servers within the
Media Status report scope are using.
Note: Click on the Total Volume Pools link to display the same chart in a new
• Mouse-over any of the pie chart sections to display pop-ups with pertinent details
about the media of the corresponding status.
• Click on any section of the pie chart to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all
media with the corresponding status.
• Click on the Total Tape Media link to go to the Tape Media Summary report for all
the servers within the report scope.
Scratch & A row for each type of media in each pool (media type/pool instance) within the report
Volume Pools scope displays in the Volume Pool Usage Forecast.
By Media This report limits the total # of instances to eight. Click on the Total Volume Pools link
Type
located at the top right of the component to view a complete report which will include
all the media type/pool instances within the report scope.
If a scratch pool exists within the report scope, the report displays the scratch pool at
the top of the report.
If the forecasted consumption for any media type/pool instance exceeds the forecasted
availability after the future time period that you selected in the report scope, the row
instance is red.

Media Availability Forecast
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Availability
Forecast
The Media Availability Forecast plots forecasted consumption against forecasted
availability. This report is NetBackup-specific.
The system calculates the forecasted consumption by the close of each day, using the
following algorithm:
(previous day’s availability + forecasted media expiration - forecasted consumption)
In order to forecast the 7 days of usage, the system averages day-of-the-week
consumption data for a historical period specified in the “Historical Data Period”
parameter on the Media Forecasting Dashboard Report Designer.
When forecasting the number of tapes consumed on each day, the system tallies the
Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume
group. The system then divides the total GByte consumption for that volume group /
media type by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This
process is repeated for each volume group / media type instance within the scope of the
report and the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line
symbols in the bar chart.
The circular line symbol tracks the # of tapes available for each day displayed on the
chart.
Place your mouse over each colored portion of a bar to see the following details for the
associated time period:
• Currently Available Storage Media
• Current Consumption
• Forecasted Consumption
• Forecasted Available
• Forecasted Tape Availability (mouse over connected circles at the top of the bars)
Media Availability Forecast 203

Media Consumption Forecast
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning >
Media Consumption Forecast
This report is NetBackup-specific.
A bar chart represents historical tape usage, with a projection of future needs. You can
select report periods ranging from one week to eight weeks of data. In addition, you can
narrow the report scope by choosing specific server groups or even clients within a
server group.
In order to forecast the seven days of usage, the report averages day-of-the-week
consumption data for a historical period specified in the Time Period.
In order to forecast the number of tapes consumed on each day, the report tallies the
Gbyte consumption for all backups written to tape per media type in each volume
group. Then the total GByte consumption for that volume group/media type is divided
by the estimated capacity of that media type in that volume group. This process is
repeated for each volume group/media type instance within the scope of the report and
the aggregated tape consumption results are displayed via the circular line symbols in
the bar chart.
Note: The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting.

Media Usage Details
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Media Consumption
Forecast
Then, click on a Media Consumed bar in the bar chart.
Client Click this link to view the Server Details Report.
Backup ID Click this link to launch the Job Details Report.

The server that is executing the backup policy. Click this link to
Mgmt Server
view the Server Details Report.
Volume Pool The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs.
Finish Time Click on this link to launch the Job Details Report.
Weekday The day of the week on which the backup occurred.
Total MBytes Total amount written to the media.
Total Files Total number of files written to the media.
Estimated Tapes Forecasted tape need for the backup job.
Tape ID Click on these links to launch the Tape Media Detail Report.
Media Usage Details 205

Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Tape Drive Usage &
Forecast
Use this report to determine if and when you need to add more tape drives to your
libraries. When you customize this report, if you enter a date range in the past, the
report will include historical usage information. If your date range includes a finish date
beyond the current day, the report will include forecast estimates.
Tip: When entering the date range in the Report Designer, use a finish date that is a few weeks
or months into the future. This will ensure that a sufficient forecast is produced. Also, to
produce a realistic forecast, group the data by Weeks, Months, or Quarters. For this type of
report, the time units of Hours and Days are too small to provide meaningful charts.
The report derives the forecast by comparing usage with your existing tape inventory.
To be safe, use the highest forecast when determining how many tape drives you need
to add.
For additional information about the tape drives in your environment, use the Tape
Library and Drive Utilization report.
The Tape Drive Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:
# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope
that you specified.
Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each color of a bar to retrieve the following
information:
• Average tape drives used previously
• Maximum tape drives used previously
• Average tape drives forecasted
• Maximum tape drives forecasted

Scratch Pool Forecast Report
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Scratch Pool Forecast
A scratch pool is a repository of media that is available to backup servers. There are a
few things that affect the availability of media in a scratch pool:
• If your backup servers run out of media, they automatically take and use media from the
scratch pool.
• If your backup servers delete data, making media available, they automatically add the
recycled media to the scratch pool.
• When you clean tapes or expire tapes, you temporarily or permanently affect the pool of
media.
Because backup success is tied directly to scratch pools, it’s important that you monitor
and forecast media usage in the scratch pools.
The Scratch Tape Usage and Forecast Report provides the following information:
# of Tapes drives The number of tape drives in all tape libraries for the report scope
that you specified.
Usage/Forecast Mouse-over each bar to retrieve the following information:
• Average scratch tapes used previously
• Maximum scratch tape used previously
• Average scratch tapes forecasted
• Maximum scratch tapes forecasted
Scratch Pool Forecast Report 207

NetBackup Library Capacity Forecast
Backup Manager > Forecasting & Capacity Planning > Library Capacity Forecast
This report can display either a bar chart view or a tabular report of library capacity,
current usage, and forecasted usage. In the Report Designer, select display as Chart or
display as Table.
Note that in the bar chart, the yellow line represents estimated library capacity. See
Estimated Capacity Notes for details.
To view this same data in tabular format, select Display as Table in the Report Designer.

The following table lists fields displayed in either the bar chart or the table.
This is the NetBackup Master Server. This links to Server

Management Server
Details.
This is the NetBackup media server that controls the library.
Controlling Server
This links to Server Details.
Library The name of the tape library.
# of Slots The number of slots in the library.
Serial Number Serial number of the tape library.
SCSII Info The device’s SCII details.
Date The date that represents the time period start date.
Current Usage Average usage, as of the associated date.
Forecasted Usage Forecasted usage, based on the reports start and end dates
NetBackup Library Capacity Forecast 209

13
Backup Billing and Usage Reports

Chapter11

• Available Billing and Usage Reports
• Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy
• Determining Media Chargebacks
• Determining Backup Chargebacks
Available Billing and Usage Reports

The Billing and Usage reports can be used to determine which business units are using
your resources. In addition, you can use these reports to calculate chargeback costs.
If you’re in the process of rolling out chargeback policies, consider using these reports
as planning tools—to see what impact your policies might have on your business units
or customers.
However, you need not charge your business units in order to find the Billing and Usage
Reports useful. You simply can use the reports to gauge which business units are
consuming the majority of your resources.
The following Billing and Usage reports are provided:
• Billing and Chargeback Summary
• Server Consumption Summary
Available Billing and Usage Reports 211

Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy
This procedure assumes that your server group hierarchy represents the logical
relationships—business units, customers, etc.—on which you want to report.
When you set the per-GB and per-tape usage costs, you do so at the server group level.
Therefore, child server group policies take precedence over parent groups. If a parent
server group (Group A) has a billing and usage policy set at $0.50/Gbyte and $35.00/
Tape and a child server group (Group B) has a usage policy set at $0.55/Gbyte and
$40.00/Tape, the servers contained in Group B would be billed at $0.55/Gbyte and
$40.00/Tape rather than the billing rate of the parent group.
When StorageConsole discovers that there is no policy set for any given group, it
traverses the server group hierarchy looking for a policy in a parent group until it finds
a billing and usage policy to use. If the application cannot find any policy as it searches
up the server group hierarchy, a value of $0.00 will be assigned for both per-GB and
per-tape usage.
To add a new billing policy for a server group:
1. From the Portal toolbar, choose Admin > Billing and Usage Policies.
The Billing and Chargeback Administration window appears.
2. Click Add.
The Billing and Chargeback Policy Administration window appears.
3. Select a Server Group name to which the policy will apply.
Note that a policy set at any particular server group will be assumed by all child server
groups that do not have a policy.
4. Enter values for Cost Per GByte, Cost Per Tape, and Cost per Duplicated GB and then click
OK.
Cost Per The amount each server within the server group should be billed per GB of
GByte disk space consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.
Cost Per The amount each server within the server group should be billed per tape
Tape drive consumed. The acceptable range is from $0.0001 - $999.9999.
The amount each server within the server group should be billed per
Cost Per
Dup’d GB duplicated consumption. The acceptable range is from
$0.0001 - $999.9999.

Determining Media Chargebacks
The Billing and Chargeback Summary report provides a line item of each client’s tape
consumption. The Billing Summary Report calculates the chargeback based on billing
and usage policies as outlined in Creating a Billing and Chargeback Policy.
The report displays data based on the servers. This procedure assumes that you know
which business units own specific servers.
There are a couple of limitations to the billing and chargeback reports:
• The report does not consider shared tape usage. If Client A wrote to tapes 1, 2 and 3, the
report shows charges for the client for those three tapes. If Client B also wrote to tapes 1 and
2, the report lists charges for that client for those two tapes. Therefore, if both Client A and
Client B belong to the same business unit, they are billed twice for two of the three tapes.
• The report always uses the current cost of a tape. If the cost changes and you generate a
new report, the report reflects the new cost. However, if you run an old report from a year
ago, it would also pick up the new cost and therefore not be the same as the original report.
Therefore, before you change the unit cost, generate and export previous reports for
comparison.
To determine chargebacks for a business unit or customer:
1. Go to the Billing and Chargeback Summary report.
Each client server row contains subtotals for GB and tape consumption.
2. To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of the Billing and
Chargeback Summary report.
3. Check the value in the Total Cost field, which appears at the right of the table. This value
is the total charge to the business unit or customer.
4. If you want to itemize your chargebacks for your business unit/customer, consider the
individual costs that comprise the total.
If you feel that the chargebacks are not accurate, do the following:
• Verify that the billing and chargeback policies are accurate. Go to Creating a Billing and
Chargeback Policy.
• Ensure that the server group does not contain clients that belong to another business unit or
customer.
Determining Media Chargebacks 213

Determining Backup Chargebacks
The Server Consumption Summary report displays backup consumption and the number
of backup files captured for all servers that you specify. The report includes backups
that were successful and those that have warnings. It does not include failed backups.
To determine server consumption chargebacks:
1. Go to the Server Consumption Summary report.
Servers that do not have any consumption or backups for the period that you specified, do
not appear in the report.
2. Drill down into the clients, management servers, or backups to get more detail.
3. If you have an ERP system, export the data to your ERP software. Go to Exporting Reports.

Billing and Chargeback Summary
Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Billing & Chargeback Summary
Tip: To limit the data to a single business unit or department, modify the scope of this report.
The usage and billing details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column
headers.
Note: If the scope of this report is for NetBackup-only server groups, three additional columns
will be included: Total Dup (GB), Cost Per Dup’d GB, and Dup’d Usage Cost GB, which are
set in the Billing and Usage Policies.
To view or modify billing and chargeback items, go to Admin > Billing and Usage
Policies.
Client Server The External Name. Click this link to access Server Details.
Business Unit/ The full pathname of the server group.
Department
Billing and Chargeback Summary 215

The amount of storage consumed by the client server during
Backed Up the specified time period.
Click this link to view a Job Summary report.
Cost Per GB Amount the client is charged per GB of consumption.
GB Usage Cost Backed Up * Cost per GB = GB Usage Cost
The # of tapes consumed by the client during the specified
# of Tapes time period.
Click this link to view a Job Summary report.
Cost Per Tape Amount the client is charged per tape consumed.
Total Tape Cost # of Tapes * Cost per Tape = Total Tape Cost
Total Dup (GB) Total duplicated storage (NetBackup-only scope)
The charge that has been configured for duplicated storage
Cost per Dup’d GB
(NetBackup-only scope)
Total Dup * Cost per Dup’d = Dup’d Usage Cost
Dup’d Usage Cost
(NetBackup-only scope)
Total Cost GB Usage Cost + Total Tape Cost = Total Cost

Server Consumption Summary
Backup Manager > Billing and Usage Reports > Server Consumption Summary
The consumption details are listed in a table, which you can sort by column headers. If
you are in a large enterprise, this table can get unwieldy, so consider modifying the
scope to filter the data by server group.
By default, the report lists clients in descending consumption order, with the heaviest
consumer at the top. The following algorithm determines total consumption:
total disk backup + total tape backup = total consumption
Tip: Sort the data by Tape Backup or Disk Backup to identify heaviest storage device
consumers.
The fields are self-explanatory, so they are not described in this section.
Use the following links to access additional details:
Link Report Generated
Client Server Details Report
Server Server Details Report
Last Backup Job Details Report
Disk Backup Job Summary Report
Tape Backup Job Summary Report
Client The client name.

IP Address IP address of the client
Server Backup server
Server Consumption Summary 217

Backup Product Backup product used to backup the client data
Last Backup Date and time of the last backup event
Disk Backup Amount of data backed up to disk
MBytes
Disk Backup Files Number of files backed up to disk
Tape Backup Amount of data backed up to tape
MBytes
Tape Backup Files Number of files backed up to tape
Number of Taps Number of tapes used for the backup

14
Backup Policies Reports

Chapter11

• NetBackup Policy
• TSM Policy Domains
• NetWorker Groups
• HP Data Protector Backup Specification Summary
• HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail
NetBackup Policy
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup Policies
This report provides the details of the underlying NetBackup Policies that have been
defined for your environment.
The server that is executing the backup policy.

Management Server
Click this link to view the Server Details Report.
Name assigned to this policy.
Policy Name
Click this link to access the Backup Policy Details report.
Indicates the specific components it is managing—for
Type
example, MS-SQL server, Oracle, NDMP, MS-Windows.
Storage Unit The name of the storage unit.
Volume Pool The name of the volume pool to which the media belongs.
NetBackup Policy 219

# of Clients # of clients being backed up.
Status The backup status code returned by NetBackup.
Backup Policy Details

Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetBackup Policies
Then, click on the Policy Name.
The Policy Details include not only a list of clients covered by the policy, but also the
scheduling details. Often the list of clients is long, so you’ll need to scroll to the bottom
of the report to see the scheduling details.

Policy Details This section includes details that are found in the NetBackup Policy page.
In addition, the following Yes/No indicators reflect the current policy set-
tings:
• Follow NFS Mount Points
• Cross Mount Point
• Client Encryption
• Client Compress
• Priority
• Keyword
• Max Jobs Per Policy
• Multiple Streams
Client Details • Client - The Client name.
• Last Backup - Date of the last backup job.
• Backups this Month - Number of backup jobs for the current month.
• Written this Month - Amount of data backed up for the current month.
• Management Server - The Server responsible for backups.
• Product Type - Backup solution product name.
• Make/Model & OS - Client’s details, if known.
NetBackup Policy 221

TSM Policy Domains
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy Domains
This report is specific to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager.
Instance Name The policy instance.

A backup group of file systems and drives. Click this link to
Domain Name
access the Policy Domain Details.
Description The domain’s description.
A management class is a policy object that users can bind to
each file to specify how the server manages the file. The
management class can contain a backup copy group, an archive
copy group, and space management attributes. A copy group
Activated
determines how the TSM server manages backup versions or
Management Class
archived copies of the file. The space management attributes
determine whether the file is eligible for migration by the space
manager client to server storage, and under what conditions the
file will be migrated.
If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were
associated with it need to rebind to another management class.
TSM will keep the backup files for a specified number of days
Backup Retention
until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate
Days
management class. After this period, the files will no longer be
retained. Retention details are defined in the TSM copy group
and default retention grace periods for the domain.
If a TSM management class is deleted, files that were
associated with it need to rebind to another management class.
Archive Retention TSM will keep the archived files for a specified number of days
Days until the server is able to rebind the files to an appropriate
management class. After this period, the files will no longer be
retained.
Number of Nodes The number of file servers registered with the TSM server.
Active When the instance became active.

Policy Domain Details
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > TSM Policy Domains
Then, click on a Domain Name.
A Policy Set is an object that contains a group of management class definitions that
exist for a policy domain. Several policy sets can exist within a policy domain, but only
one policy set can be active at a time.
TSM Policy Domains 223

NetWorker Groups
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > NetWorker Groups
EMC NetWorker provides a Group resource to automate backups on a group-by-group
basis. By setting up groups, you can manage the load on backup servers.
The EMC NetWorker server that is managing the backups for

Server
the associated group. Click on this link to access server details.
A group of clients to be backed up. Click this name to view the
Group Name
list of client instances in the Group Detail report.
If Autostart is Enabled, the group will begin being backed up at
Start Time
this time.
Interval The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups.
This attribute indicates if the group will be backed up
automatically for each time period specified as the interval.
Values include: E = Enabled, which means clients will be
Autostart
backed up automatically at the time specified in Start Time; D =
Disabled; S = Start now, which means that clients are backed up
immediately, overriding the start time.
NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by
Schedule Override
selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart.
Backup Status for the group can be one of the following:
Status Running, Idle, Finished, Not Finished (backup exited without
completing), Preview Run (test a backup configuration)

Group Detail
Then, click on a Group Name.
A NetWorker Group provides the mechanism for establishing which clients will be
backed up together and then scheduled for their backups. This report displays the
NetWorker Group Control details.
The following NetWorker-specific details are provided in this report.
Group Name A group of clients to be backed up.

NetWorker allows you to override a scheduled backup by
Schedule Override
selecting a default group and initiating a Start Now autostart.
Start Time When the group backup is scheduled to begin.
Override levels can be configured for a specific date in a
Override Level NetWorker backup schedule, enabling you to override the
backup level setting for every client in that group.
When enabled, this attribute triggers regularly scheduled
Auto-Start
backups.
Interval The frequency with which autostart will initiate backups.
Backup Status for the group can be one of the following:
Status Running, Idle, Finished, Not Finished (backup exited without
completing), Preview Run (test a backup configuration)
When this field is set to Yes, if two full backups start within a
24-hour period, NetWorker forces the second one to be an
Force Incremental
incremental backup. (for an interval attribute of less than 24
hours)
NetWorker Groups 225

Last Start/End The last time the group started/ended a save operation.
Duration Duration of the last group save.

NetWorker uses a cloning process to make copies of saved data.
In addition to copying the data, NetWorker keeps track of the
details of the cloning operation in a client file index and in the
Clones & Clone Pool
media database. When the Clones attribute is set to Yes,
NetWorker automatically clones a save set whenever it is
backed up. The Clone Pool indicates where the clones are sent.
This restart attribute indicates if a group should be
Auto Restart
automatically restarted after an incomplete save operation.
Indicates the success or failure of the groups save set
Success Threshold
operations.
You can configure NetWorker to be persistent in cases where a
client may be hung. Based on the Client Retries value,
Client Retries
NetWorker will make multiple attempts at backing up a client
before it moves on to other clients.
The inactivity (in minutes) before NetWorker determines that
Inactivity Time-out
the client is hung.
The NetWorker server can perform simultaneous backups in
Save Group either of the following ways:
Parallelism multiple save sets from multiple clients
multiple save sets from a single client.
Client Instance Name Click on this link to access the Client Instance Detail report.
Scheduled Backup Indicates if there is a backup scheduled
Schedule Schedule description
Last Successful Click on this link to access the Job Details Report.
Backup
Comment Comments related to the schedule

Client Instance Detail
Then, click on a Group Name and then click on a Client Instance Name.
NetWorker Groups 227

HP Data Protector Backup Specification Summary
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HP DP Backup Specification
The HP Data Protector Backup Specification report lists the Backup Specification, with
the objects that are backed up, the servers and the next time the backup will be
performed. Note that the objects can be entire disks or volumes, or sub-sets of these,
such as directories or the Windows Registry.
Specification Links to the HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail

Server Backup server
Object Type The type of data for which the backup specification is
configured—database entity or a disk image (raw disk)—for
example, filesystem.
# of Clients Number of clients backed up by this backup specification
Next Backup Mode Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr
8, Incr 9
Next Backup Date Date and time of the next backup

HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail
Backup Manager > Backup Policies > HP DP Backup Specification
Then, click on a Specification link.
The HP Data Protector Backup Specification Detail report lists the details of the
specification, such as mount points and clients. Each of the media must be in a media
pool.
Specification Specification Name

Object Type The type of data for which the backup specification is
configured—database entity or a disk image (raw disk)—for
example, filesystem.
Next Backup Mode Full, Incr, Incr 1, Incr 2, Incr 3, Incr 4, Incr 5, Incr 6, Incr 7, Incr
8, Incr 9
Next Backup Date Date and time stamp of the next backup
HP Data Protector Backup Specification Summary 229

Pre Exec Script Pre-execution script name
Name
Post Exec Script Post-execution script name
Name
Status The current status of the specification
Object’s Latest Backup and Not Configured File Systems

A table lists the mount points, with the scheduled backup type, media pool, and last full &
incremental backup dates.
Mount Point A mount point provides the access to the directory structure for a
disk or logical volume on the client, to locate the backup object.
Client The client links to the Mount Point Details
Next Backup Mode Type of backup that is scheduled next, for example, Full
Media Pool The media pool in which this data was stored
Last Full Backup Date and time of the last full backup for this mount point
Last Incr Backup Date and time of the last incremental backup for this mount point
Not Configured File Systems
Mount Point Mount points listed in the “Not Configured Filesystems” table
indicate mount points that are not backed up.
External Name The name of the server
Backup Specification Schedules

A table lists the backup specification schedules, if any: Mode and Schedule Time

15

Chapter11
Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, over-consumption, and under-
utilized storage. These reports provide end-to-end storage capacity reporting: both a
host-to-array view and an array-to-host view.
• Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process
• Overview of Capacity Manager Reports
• Why Capacity Manager?
• Capacity Manager Reports
• Capacity Manager Quick-Start List
• Application Capacity & Utilization
• Array Capacity and Utilization
• List Array Groups
• Host Capacity & Utilization
• Host Utilization Detail
• LUN Utilization Summary
• Array Group Details
• Array Port Utilization
• Array Capacity Forecast
• Host Capacity Forecast
• Applications At Risk
• Over-Provisioned Applications
• Application Storage Dashboard
• Available/Reclaimable Storage
• Capacity Chargeback and Billing
• LUNs At Risk
• Over-Provisioned LUNs
• Hosts at Risk
• Over-Provisioned Hosts
In addition, a set of NetApp-specific reports comes packaged with Capacity Manager.
These reports are described in NetApp Capacity Reports. A set of reports, specific to
the IBM 6000 & 8000 Series, is also available, described in IBM Arrays - Capacity
Reports.
For an overview of how Capacity Manager works, see the Getting Started Guide for
Administrators.
231
Overview of the Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process
The following example of the provisioning process provides insight into how storage
can disappear from an enterprise radar screen, causing inefficient use of existing
storage and ineffective planning for future requirements.
1. A department requests storage from the provisioning team.

Often the request for storage occurs months before a project’s servers go online. And, often
the request exceeds the true need.
2. The provisioning team sets up a LUN and assigns it to a host.
The LUN is not yet available for mounting file systems on the host.
3. The storage allocation ticket is handed off to the group that will manage the host.
Often the storage requestor is not the owner of the host.
4. The system administrator must perform a LUN scan or a system re-boot in order for the
host to be able to see the LUN. Often, this is the step that doesn’t get done.

Overview of Capacity Manager Reports
Capacity Manager reports provide insight into the variance between allocated and used
storage, along with predictive analysis of future needs. See also, Overview of the
Enterprise Storage Provisioning Process.
Why Capacity Manager?

Drive efficient utilization of network storage
• Reclaim unused storage
• Reduce annual storage management costs
• Defer, reduce, or cancel storage acquisitions
• Track storage utilization automatically, instead of manually updating spreadsheets that are
out-of-date each day
Access application-centric metrics

• Metrics provide insight into not only host and storage array usage, but also application usage
• Applications use storage, not hosts

The following table provides a summary of the Capacity Manager reports that can be
accessed from the Menu Groups at the left of the Portal window. Each report is
described in detail in subsequent sections. In addition, a recommended get-acquainted
report sequence is provided in the Capacity Manager Quick-Start List.
Menu Groups & Reports Descriptions

Array Capacity and Utilization Overview of storage array capacity and utilization. Use this report
to identify storage arrays that are under-utilized. Drill down to the
List Array Groups page to view details about each of the array
groups associated with a storage array.
Host Capacity & Utilization Overview of host utilization. Drill down to details in the Host
Utilization Detail.Without these reports, you would need to access
each host to gather the details.
LUN Utilization Summary If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that
you can change their size or reassign them altogether. View all the
LUN mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.
Drill down to the Array Group Details to view all the LUNs and
the physical devices associated with the selected array group. This
report can be filtered to display the following subsets of LUN
data:
• Allocated, but unused
• Allocated, but undiscovered
• Unallocated
Overview of Capacity Manager Reports 233

Array Port Utilization Lists the physical/logical port connections between the host’s
HBA and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot
connectivity issues and to re-configure when hosts or arrays are
taken out of service. In addition, this report provides information
you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports.
Host HBA Summary Lists HBA details by host.
NetApp Aggregate Summary Summary of how physical aggregates are configured to manage
disks, RAID groups, and plexes. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
NetApp Volume Summary Summary of the logical volume with links to the associated
QTree, LUN, and Snapshot details. See NetApp Capacity
Reports.
NetApp NFS Summary Lists the volumes that are exported via NFS. See NetApp
Capacity Reports.
NetApp CIFS Summary Lists the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts via
CIFS shares. See NetApp Capacity Reports.
QTree Summary Summary of the quota management configurations. See NetApp
Capacity Reports.
NetApp Snapshot Summary Lists snapshot details for the time report’s time interval. See
NetApp Capacity Reports.
NetApp Disk Summary Lists the disk within a storage system. See NetApp Capacity
Reports.
IBM Array Site Summary Lists IBM Array Sites with drilldowns to details. See IBM Arrays
- Capacity Reports.
IBM Array Summary Summary of Array capacity with drilldowns to Array, Array Site,
and Rank capacity details. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
IBM Rank Summary Summary of IBM Ranks with drilldowns to details. See IBM
Arrays - Capacity Reports.
IBM Extent Pool Summary Summary of IBM Extent Pools with drilldowns to details. See
IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
IBM Disk Summary Summary of the physical disks with associated array and array
site information. See IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports.
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary of the Dynamic Provision Pool capacity details. See
Summary HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports.
Hitachi Disk Summary See HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports.
Storage Capacity & Forecast
Array Capacity Forecast Project growth in storage usage. You can generate the report by
the following criteria:
• Historical date range
• Forecast horizon (date range)
• Storage Array Group
• Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity

Host Capacity Forecast At-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage—from the
host’s perspective. You can narrow the scope of this report by
specifying a storage type filter of: SAN, DAS, or NAS.
Available or Reclaimable Storage
Array Utilization Dashboard Provides utilization statistics for Hitachi, EMC Symmetrix, and
NetApp storage arrays.
Array Utilization Summary Displays a summary listing of each array’s capacity and usage.
Allocated but Unused LUNs Lists LUNs that were discovered by the host, but no volumes have
been created from the LUNs.
Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs Lists LUNs for which the host has no knowledge. These LUNs
have storage paths, but have no knowledge of the disks, partitions,
or volume groups on the hosts associated with those storage paths.
Unallocated LUNs Lists LUNs that are not allocated to any hosts. These LUNs have
no storage paths.
Suspected De-provisioned Hosts Storage often is allocated from a storage array and provisioned to
a host, but when that host is re-assigned or de-provisioned, the
storage remains unused. This report list hosts that are candidates
for re-assignment.
Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes This report lists logical volumes created from disks or volume
groups, but no file systems have been create on these logical
volumes.
Unused Disks/Volume Groups This report provides insight into wasted space on hosts. It displays
the total volume group and disk capacity, along with used and
available capacity.
Application Capacity & Utilization
Applications At Risk Identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage
space.
Over-Provisioned Applications Identify applications that are at risk of having over-provisioned
storage—resulting in wasted storage.
Application Storage Dashboard This report essentially interrogates the application to identify
what storage is free. The table has three main sections of
information: Application Storage, File System Storage, and Array
Storage. Expand a listed application to see sub-components.
Chargeback and Billing
Capacity Chargeback By Host View usage and user-defined chargeback/billing by host.

Chargeback Policy Capacity View a list of capacity associated with capacity chargeback
policies.
Capacity At Risk
LUNs At Risk LUNs at risk are determined by evaluating current and projected
usage.

Over-Provisioned LUNs Over-provisioning leads to increased costs unless you reclaim the
space. Use this report to find wasted space—at the file system or
mount point level. LUNs that appear on this list have storage
allocated to hosts that are not fully utilizing that storage. Since
this report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that
has not reached the specified threshold.
Hosts at Risk This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate
attention. Use the host link to drill down to particulars. Select a
capacity threshold: Low, Warning, Critical.
Over-Provisioned Hosts Determine which hosts are over-provisioned. Reclaim the space
before committing resources to acquire additional storage.
NetApp Aggregates at Risk For thin provisioning, this report lists host usage that is about to
exceed the storage that was promised.
NetApp Volumes at Risk Lists thin-provisioned volumes that may be at risk of over-
commitment.

Capacity Manager Quick-Start List
Use the following sequence of selected reports to become acquainted with the details
that support your capacity management process. This quick-start list provides a brief
preview of the capacity optimization that can be achieved using Capacity Manager.
Note: Keep in mind that in an enterprise, multiple teams have various responsibilities in the
storage provisioning process—providing ample opportunities for storage to drop out of sight.
Capacity Manager Reports Focus your attention on:

1. LUN Utilization Summary • Generate this report by selecting one or more storage
arrays. Then, expand/contract a row to view the mount
point details. See LUN Utilization Summary.
• Then, generate this report again and in the Report Designer
window, select the LUN status of: Allocated but
undiscovered. Note that in this version of the report,
mount point details are missing because the storage has
been allocated, but has not yet been discovered and
therefore it cannot be used by an application. This same
report is available as: Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs.
2. Host Capacity & Utilization • Without this report, an administrator would have to touch
every host to gather information. This report, along with
the Host Utilization Detail report, replaces manually
created spreadsheets for tracking host usage.
• Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report.
3. Host Utilization Detail • Access this report from a host link in the Host Capacity &
Utilization report.
• Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to
identify unallocated space in a Volume Group and logical
volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details
highlight inefficient use of storage.
• Expand the Disk Details (click on the +) to view the raw
disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks.
4. Over-Provisioned LUNs • Use this report to identify LUNs that have been allocated,
but the storage is not being used by the host.
• Click a host link to view the Host Utilization Detail report.
5. Array Capacity and Utilization • Focus on the two columns at the right of this report—
RAID Group Capacity and LUN Capacity— and their
corresponding usage thermometers. If you have NetApp
storage, view Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp
View).
6. Applications At Risk • Identify which applications are expected to exceed storage
capacity and when.

Array Capacity and Utilization
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Capacity & Utilization
Use this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized or highly utilized.
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager
Reports.
Several versions of this report display data relevant to the type of storage:
• NetApp - Because NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructs—such as Aggregates and
Volumes—to organize and access its storage, additional NetApp-specific data is available
via this report. For information about the NetApp-specific version of this report, see Array
Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View).
• HDS Dynamic Provisioning - View details related to Dynamic Provisioning Pools via the
Array Capacity & Utilization (HDP View).
• IBM Arrays - View array details, including Extent Pool, Array Site, and Rank capacity via
the Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View).
• Other Storage Arrays - The information from all other storage array types is displayed in
the format shown below.
Figure 15.1 Example of an Array Capacity & Utilization Report

The report is organized into four columns:
1. Array Summary

2. Raw Capacity - Raw capacity is the summation of the physical disks. Usable space is the
space that is calculated from RAID groups and LUNs.
3. RAID Group Capacity or Aggregate/Volume Capacity (for NetApp storage)
4. LUN Capacity
Array Summary
The array information can be used to reference the array vendor’s capacity limits.
The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all
Storage supported storage devices. From here you can drill down to the array.
Array For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE StorageConsole Certified
Configurations Guide.
The family classification of the storage array as assigned by the vendor.
Family
Use this name to ascertain the vendor’s product specifications.
Type The specific model of the storage array.
Vendor The name of the vendor that distributes the storage array.
The name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field
Product provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per
array, and drives per array.
This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this
storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or
# Hosts more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been
collected. Click on the Hosts link to go to the Host Capacity &
Utilization.
The number of ports in the array. Click on this link to view the Array Port
# Ports
Utilization.
Host Usage Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.
Array Capacity and Utilization 239

Raw Capacity
This column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in
particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status.
NOTE: When calculating capacity, Capacity Manager makes requests to the Device
Manager for physical devices (PDEVs) for all Array Groups in a storage array.
For EMC Symmetrix arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks
from all array groups—no spares. Note: When viewing raw capacity in
EMC Control Center, disk group 0 (hot spares) is not included in the total
capacity calculation—accounting for the difference between the EMC
and Capacity Manager reported capacity values.
For EMC CLARiiON arrays: Sum of the capacity of all physical disks
Capacity from all array groups—including spares (drives that are not allocated to
an array group)
For HDS arrays: Sum of capacity of all PDEVs from all array groups.
Capacity Manager assumes that all PDEVs are part of an array group, so
PDEVs that are marked as “not included in an array group” (-1) are
included in the capacity calculation. That is, no disks are treated as
spares.
Total raw capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been mapped to a
Allocated host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and
Size dedicated to an application.Unallocated storage is storage that is not part
of an Array Group.
Total raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID
Available
group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced
Size
option when you generated the report.
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that
have not been assigned to a host and that are available for provisioning.
% Available
This percentage is a better capacity indicator than the number shown as
Available Size.
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that
Raw Usage
have been assigned to a host and that are not available for provisioning.

RAID Group Capacity
The RAID Group information can be used to identify array group statistics.
The number of array groups in the storage array. Links to List

# RAID Groups
Array Groups.
RAID Groups Capacity Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks

Applicable to HDS arrays only - Capacity from a back-end
system, derived from daisy-chained external storage (back-end
Virtual Capacity
systems). This is array group capacity that does not have
PDEVs in the storage array.
Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage
RAID Groups Used
array.
RAID Groups Available Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage
RAID Group Usage
used
LUN Capacity
Several LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can
determine the capacity of each configured LUN.
The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on the
# LUNs
Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary Report.
Total LUN The total capacity for the LUNs.
Capacity
# Open For Hitachi arrays, the number of open allocated LUNs links to the LUN
Allocated Utilization Summary.
LUNs
Open Alloc For Hitachi arrays, the total capacity of the open allocated LUNs.
LUN Capacity
The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host. These
LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and dedicated to an
application.
# Allocated
storage array --> array port --> host storage domain --> HBA port --> host
LUNs
Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the LUN link to go to the LUN
Utilization Summary Report.
Allocated LUN The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs.
Capacity
UnAllocated The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated.
LUNs
Array Capacity and Utilization 241

UnAllocated The available LUN capacity.
LUN Capacity
LUN Usage Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage allocated
List Array Groups

Then, click the # RAID Groups link.
This report provides a summary of each of the array groups associated with a storage
array, with drilldowns to additional details.
Group # The number of the array group

Group Name The name of the array group, which links to Array Group
Details.
Storage Array The array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.
Chassis Number The chassis to which the group belongs.
RAID Type RAID type
Total Capacity Total storage capacity of the group.
Allocated Capacity Allocated storage capacity
Free Capacity Available storage

Host Capacity & Utilization
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & Utilization
Use the Host Capacity and Utilization report to view an overview of host utilization to
determine if there’s contention for storage.Typically, once you’ve reviewed this high-
level report, you’ll want to access the details reported by the Host Utilization Detail.
Host The name of the host utilizing the storage. Click on a Host
name link to view the Host Utilization Detail.
# of Allocated LUNs The number of LUNs that have been allocated to this host.
Click on this number to launch the LUN Utilization Summary.
Allocated Capacity The total capacity of all Volumes both free and used that has
been given to the host. When there is a significant discrepancy
between the Allocated Capacity and the Seen by Host, it is an
indication that there may be storage that can be reclaimable.
# of Used LUNs LUNs that are currently used by the host. Click on this number
to launch the LUN Utilization Summary.
Seen by Host The sum of all SAN capacity actually deployed or accepted by
the host. This is the storage that the host has been allocated
and is using—but this use could be as simple as adding the
storage to a volume group. It does not mean that the server has
that storage mounted. Mounted storage is reflected in Volume
Capacity: DAS/SAN.
# of Arrays The total arrays associated with this host. Click on the number
to launch the Array Capacity and Utilization.
Related Hosts Hosts that are related to this host via clustering—they have
multipathing to the same LUNs for failover.
# Volumes: SAN/DAS The number of SAN/DAS volumes created from the allocated
LUNs
Host Capacity & Utilization 243

# of Volumes: NAS The number of NAS volumes created from the allocated
LUNs
# of Volumes at Risk The number of host volumes that are at risk of reaching
capacity, based on configured thresholds. Click on the number
link to view the Host Utilization Detail.
Volume Capacity: Total DAS/SAN storage capacity for this host
DAS/SAN
Volume Capacity: Total NAS storage capacity for this host
NAS
Volume Usage: DAS/ This is the actual amount of SAN/DAS storage used by the
SAN host
Volume Usage: NAS This is the actual amount of NAS storage used by the host

Reports.

Host Utilization Detail
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host Capacity & Utilization
Then, drill down to the details.
Click a # of Volumes at Risk link.
In addition, this report can be accessed from several other reports via drill-down links,
as shown in the following table:
From this Report: Click this Link:

LUN Utilization Summary Host
Host Utilization Summary Host
Array Port Utilization Host
LUNs At Risk Host
Hosts At Risk Name
Use this Host Utilization Detail report to quickly determine critical capacity issues. In
particular, focus on the % Available column to find specific at-risk volumes. When a
host falls below the designated threshold, the data in the % Available column displays
in a different color to call your attention to the problem.
Figure 15.2 Host Utilization Detail (Overview)
Host Utilization Detail 245

Figure 15.3 Host Utilization Detail (Part 1)
Figure 15.4 Host Utilization Detail (Part 2)

Host Details
Hostname Host name links to server details
Location Physical location of the host, if available

Last time the data was collected and stored in the portal
Last Poll Date
database
Display Name The external host/server name
Make Make of the server, if field is populated
IP Address Host IP address
Model Model of the server, if field is populated
Type Type of server, such as TSM Media Server
Operating System The host’s operating system, if this field is populated
Volumes
Mount Point Mount point of the file system
Raw File System File system name

When you know the file system type, you can determine the
host’s storage requirements and limitations.
Examples of file system values:

• NTFS - Windows NT File System
• ext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3
• ufs - Unix File System
• vxfs - Veritas File System
• FAT - File Allocation Table
• hfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple)
• ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File System
• devfs - Device File System
File System Type • hsfs - High Sierra File System
• jfs - Journaled File System
• jfs2 - Journaled File System 2
• nfs - Network File System
• objfs - File System Object
• sfs - Secure File System
• gpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM)
• proc - a virtual file system
• procfs - Process File System
• tmpfs - a virtual memory file system
• smbfs - Server Message Block File System
• Null - empty
• NA - not applicable
NAS - Network-attached storage; file servers and software
dedicated to providing files over a network.
Storage Type SAN - Storage area network; Fibre Channel connected file
servers.
DAS - direct-attached storage; part of the host computer.
Volume Group The volume group and logical volume names.
Capacity The host’s file system storage capacity.
Used The amount of the host’s storage that is currently in use.
% Available The percentage of the capacity that is unused.
90 Days Min Used Use these three columns in combination to substantiate the
90 Days Avg Used need for additional storage. Using 90 days worth of data, this
90 Days Max Used provides a realistic snapshot of how the forecast was derived.

NAS Shares
This Network Attached Storage Shares table provides details similar to the mount point
table, without the Volume Group column.
Allocated and Unused LUNs

This table shows any LUNs that have not been partitioned or allocated to a volume
group. Therefore, they are not associated with a mount point or file system. This list
will be displayed for LUNs that match this “allocated but unused” criteria.
Name LUN name
RAID Type The RAID type of the LUN

The storage array of the LUN links to the Array Capacity and
Storage Array
Utilization
Array Group The Array Group for the LUN
Product Array product identifier
Capacity Capacity of the LUN
Host Links to the Host Utilization Detail
Disks
This table lists the disks associated with the host’s utilization. Expand the Disk Details (click on
the +) to view the raw disk paths, storage types, and LUNs associated with disks.
Multi-pathed disks also are represented in this list. Multi-pathing is supported for the following
products: EMC PowerPath, Hitachi Dynamic Link Manager (HDLM), and Symantec Dynamic
Multi Pathing (DMP).
Disk Name Disk name
Disk Make The vendor information
Storage Type DAS, SAN, NAS

The Array Group for the disk links to the Array Capacity and
Storage Array
Utilization
LUN The LUN links to the LUN Utilization Summary
Size Disk size
Raw Disk Path Disk path

Disk Partitions/Volume Group Details
Expand the Volume Group Details (click on the +) to identify unallocated space in a
Volume Group and logical volumes that are not being used by hosts. These details
highlight inefficient use of storage.
This table will be present only when there are one or more volume groups set up on the
selected host. The table displays each volume group along with the physical disks that
have been allocated to the volume group and the logical volume details. Use this table
to find any un-allocated storage—that is, space that is available within the volume
group that has not been assigned to a logical volume.
If the Array name is missing from a table entry it is because it is a local disk.
Note: Totals in a Volume Group reflect usable capacity—so, for example, RAID 1 mirrored
disks will show only the capacity that is usable.
Volume Group The name of the volume group
Type LUN or DSK
Name LUN or Disk name
Array Storage array; if this field is empty, it means it is a local disk
Physical Disk Name Name of the disk
Size Disk capacity
Group Membership
Displays the server groups for which the host is a member. Click on a server group link to view
additional membership details.
Note: The Capacity and Used columns are aggregated and then converted to the units selected
in the Advanced option of the report from which the Host Utilization Detail was launched. Note
that in the conversion to the displayed units, the totals may appear to be slightly inaccurate. This
is due to the division or multiplication by 1024.

LUN Utilization Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization Summary
If LUNs are not being used efficiently, you want to know so that you can change their
allocation or reassign them altogether. Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can
view all the mapping details, such as mount points and file systems.
• For NetApp-specific LUN Utilization details, see NetApp LUN Utilization Summary.
• For additional Capacity Manager information, see Overview of Capacity Manager Reports.
This report can be filtered (in the Report Designer window) to report on the following
subsets of data:
• Unallocated - These are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any host. The array has
created the LUN, but there is no storage path.
• Allocated, but undiscovered - Often referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that
have been assigned to a host, but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on
the host side. The array has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no
access to host port and host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To
make these LUNs visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for
older OS and volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not
available for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a
LUN has been zoned to the host.
• Allocated, but unused - These are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has
not been placed into a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has
LUN Utilization Summary 251

created the LUN and the storage path exists, making the host and host port information
available to Capacity Manager. However, the host storage details—disks, partitions, and
volume groups—are not available for the host associated with the storage path.
Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated, but
undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.
Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical detailed

view, including mount point details. This arrow is not
displayed if the LUN does not have multiple mount points or
has no mount points.
Name The name of the LUN.
Raid Type The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates
Disk, there is no RAID protection.
Aggregate (NetApp only)
Volume (NetApp only)
QTree QTree associated with the LUN (NetApp only)
Array Group The group to which the array belongs.
Links to the Array Group Details.
Storage Array The array on which the LUN was created.
Click on the array name link to go to the Array Capacity &
Utilization report.
Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN.
Estimated Used LUN estimated used.
See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability.
Estimated Available Estimated available LUN storage.
Mount Point Used The amount of storage used by each mount point. These
values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount
point details.
Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated.
Click on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
Host LUN The LUN to which the host is mapped.
Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN. It is possible
to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario
where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has
not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting
it.
File System The host’s file system or drive name to which the LUN maps.
LUNs simply appear as disks to hosts.
Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume
belongs
iGroup Initiator Group name. For NetApp storage, a LUN is mapped
to an iGroup—a method of LUN masking.

Host Storage Domain The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs
that can be accessed by multiple hosts through the same
physical storage port, with each host accessing its unique
LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled
with this capability. A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name
for multi-hosted storage capability.
Array Port WWN The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port
address.
iSCSI Interface The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a
LUN. (NetApp only)
LUN Utilization Summary 253

Estimated LUN Usage/Availability
Several Capacity Manager reports display certain LUN values as estimated—Estimated
Usage, Estimated Available. These values are estimated because of the following logic
for deriving the values:
• A volume group has members that are made up of many disks.
• These disks may be local disks or LUNs from one or more arrays.
• Partitions are created from a volume group and then the partition is mounted onto a host, so
that the host can use the mounted partition.
• Because of the above sequence, Capacity Manager cannot determine which partition
came from which LUN. Therefore, using the available information, the values are
estimated.

Array Group Details
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > LUN Utilization Summary
Then, drill down to the details:
Click an Array Group link.
This report lists all the LUNs and the physical devices associated with the selected array
group.
Array Links to the Array Capacity & Utilization

Chassis Number The array’s chassis number
Group Name The array group name
Group Number The array group number
Object ID The object ID, for object-based storage
RAID Type RAID type for the array group
Total Total capacity for this array group
Allocated Amount of space that has already been allocated
Free Amount of space available
LUN Links to the LUN Utilization Summary
Total Capacity LUN’s capacity
RAID Type LUN’s RAID type
Device Number LUN’s device number
Array Group Details 255

Device Name Physical disk name
Capacity Disk’s capacity
Vendor Disk manufacturer
Serial # Disk’s serial number
Model Disk model
Firmware Current firmware version of the device

Version
EMC CLARiiON Storage Array Group Specifics

For EMC CLARiiON storage arrays, the operating system uses a small amount of
storage for internal processing. So, in the Array Group Details report, you will notice a
difference in the Total (at the top left of the report) and the sum of the Capacity in the
List of Physical Devices table (at the bottom right of the report).

Host HBA Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Host HBA Summary
Name Host name

Device Name The HBA device name collected from the host
Node WWN The node’s worldwide name
Node Nickname The node’s nickname, if there is one assigned
Driver HBA driver
Driver Version HBA driver version
Firmware Firmware version
Version
HBA Model Model of the host bus adapter
Manufacturer HBA manufacturer
Vendor Vendor of the host bus adapter
Last Updated Last time data collection updated these values in the portal database
Host HBA Summary 257

Array Port Utilization
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Array Port Utilization
This report provides a list of the physical/logical port connections between the host’s
adapter and the storage array. Use this report to troubleshoot connectivity issues and to
re-configure when hosts or arrays are taken out of service. In addition, this report
provides information you can use to manage load-balancing across array ports.
Reports.
The array links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.

Storage Array You can select multiple storage arrays or a single array when
you generate this report.
Array Port The array’s port number
Name of the host that owns the HBA (host bus adaptor) port.
Host
Links to the Host Utilization Detail.
Host Ports List of the host ports.
Mount Point The mount point of the file system that’s utilizing the port.
File System Name of the file system.

When you know the file system type, you can determine the
host’s storage requirements and limitations.
Examples of file system values:

NTFS - Windows NT File System
ext2, ext3 - Extended File Systems 2 and 3
ufs - Unix File System
vxfs - Veritas File System
FAT - File Allocation Table
hfs - Hierarchical File System (Apple)
ctfs - Cooperative Temporary File System
devfs - Device File System
File System Type hsfs - High Sierra File System
jfs - Journaled File System
jfs2 - Journaled File System 2
nfs - Network File System
objfs - File System Object
sfs - Secure File System
gpfs - General Parallel File System (IBM)
proc - a virtual file system
procfs - Process File System
tmpfs - a virtual memory file system
smbfs - Server Message Block File System
Null - empty
NA - not applicable
Capacity Capacity of the file system.
Used The amount of the storage array being used by the file system.
Array Port Utilization 259

Array Capacity Forecast
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Array Capacity Forecast
Use the Capacity Forecast report to project growth in storage usage. You can generate
the report by the following criteria:
• Historical date range
• Forecast horizon (date range)
• Storage Array Group
• Forecast by Array Capacity or LUN Capacity
In addition, you can choose to generate graphs for each, individual array or instead,
display a consolidated graph for all the arrays selected in the Report Designer.
Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view:

• Historical Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity
• Forecasted Usage: Allocated and Total Capacity
The Array name links to the Array Capacity and Utilization.
The name of the storage array. Links to the Array Capacity

Array
and Utilization.
This line tracks the historical and forecasted allocation.
Allocated Capacity
This line tracks the historical and forecasted capacity.
Total Capacity

Reports.

Host Capacity Forecast
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Forecast > Host Capacity Forecast
This forecast report provides an at-a-glance overview of historical and predicted usage.
Note: To ensure that your report reflects both historical and forecasted usage, when you
generate the report, verify that your date range starts on a past date and ends on a future date.
The current day is treated as the future for the purpose of forecasting. Typically, if you specify
three months before and after the current day, you’ll have sufficient data for a valid forecast.
The default display is Grouped by Months. However, to see results based on previous weeks,
choose Group by Weeks in the Report Designer. The Group by Weeks option is especially
useful during the first few weeks of Capacity Manager deployment.
You also can narrow the scope of this report by specifying a storage type filter of: SAN,
DAS, or NAS.
When you generate this report, you can select the type of output—either by host or by
file system. If you select file system, the specific path, host name, and mount point will
be associated with each graph.
1. Mouse-over the thermometer to view usage.

2. Mouse-over the markers on the lines to view:
• Historical Usage: Average and Maximum Size
• Forecasted Usage: Average and Maximum Size
3. Click the Host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
4. Click the Total Volumes link to view the Host Capacity Forecast by File System.
Date The first day of the period for which the usage is projected.
Avg Size The historical average usage.
Max Size The historical maximum usage.
Host Capacity Forecast 261

The projected usage based on the average usage history (or
Avg Size Future
historical average usage for periods in history).
The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or
Max Size Future

Reports.

Applications At Risk
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Applications At Risk
Using this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of running out of storage
space. Identify which applications are expected to run out of storage and when.
Note: The Applications at Risk report supports the following applications: SQL Server and
Oracle Database.
Name The application at risk.

The first date of the period for which the usage is projected.The risk date is
Risk Date
based on the historical growth of the application’s usage.
The projected usage based on the average usage history (or historical
Usage
average usage for periods in history).
Projected High- The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or historical
Water Mark average usage for periods in history).
Capacity The database capacity.
Current Usage Database storage already in use.

Thresholds can be set by an administrator using Admin > Threshold
Policies. When determining when an application is “at risk,” several
factors are taken into consideration. First, if a threshold has been set for a
particular application—that is, a database threshold—then that threshold is
used to determine the risk. If there is no threshold associated with the
Threshold
application’s database, then other thresholds are checked, in the following
sequence: Host for the associated LUN/Filesystem/Database > Server
group to which the host belongs > Top-level, global server group.
If no threshold settings are found at the above levels, the system defaults
are used: 90% for Critical, 70% for Warning, and 30% for Low.

Reports.
Applications At Risk 263

Over-Provisioned Applications
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Over Provisioned
Applications
Using this report, you can identify applications that are at risk of having over-
provisioned storage. Often, storage is allocated to a project, but never used. This report
helps you to identify excess, unused storage so that it can be reclaimed for another
purpose.
The application that has been given storage that remains

Name
unused.
As of The first date of the period for which the usage is projected.
The projected usage based on the average usage history (or
Usage
The projected usage based on the maximum usage history (or
High-Water Mark
Capacity The database capacity
Current Usage Database storage already in use
Available Amount of storage still available

An application is determined to be over-provisioned when the
Threshold
usage is under the threshold.

Reports.

Application Storage Dashboard
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage
Dashboard
This report essentially interrogates the application to identify what storage is free. In
addition, this report provides data that can be used to resolve performance issues. The
table has three main sections of information: Application Storage, File System Storage,
and Array Storage.
Click on the arrow to drill down to a hierarchical Application

Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard view. Each
subsequent drilldown takes you to the next level of the
application, such as the table space and file system level.
The name of the level. For the application level, the name will
be specific to the application, such as Exchange or Oracle. If it
Application
is the tablespace level, the name of the respective tablespace is
displayed.
Host The host(s) associated with the application
Total storage allocated to the application.
Application Storage
App. Used + App. Free = App. Total
Total
The total may not be precise to the decimal, as 1 Kbyte = 1024.
Amount of storage available for the application. In some cases,
Application Storage
storage does not need to be pre-allocated to the application, so
Free
this field will display as N/A.
Amount of storage consumed by the application. This is the
Application Storage amount of consumed storage as reported by the application. For
Used example, in Oracle within a data file it would display how
much space is really being consumed by Oracle.
File System Storage This total indicates the amount of storage used by the file
Total system associated with the application.
Amount of unused and available file system storage. Refer to
File System Storage
this value to determine if there is space to expand a files
Free
system.
Application Storage Dashboard 265

File System Storage Amount of used file system storage.
Used
This total indicates the amount of storage used by the array on
Array Storage Total
which this application is located.
Array Storage Free Amount of available array storage.
Array Storage Used Amount of used array storage.

A concatenated list of LUNs from which the space is being
LUNs
taken by this application.

Reports.

Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard
Capacity Manager > Application Capacity & Utilization > Application Storage
Dashboard
Then, click the arrow to drill down to the Application Level detail.
The data displayed in this window is simply the next level within the application—that
is, instance-level reporting, as described in Application Storage Dashboard. At the
application sub-level, a host link launches the Host Utilization Detail.
For example, an Oracle Database Administrator may be interested in managing storage
at the tablespace level. Using the Application Storage Dashboard, the administrator can
expand the Oracle application to view table space and also file system usage. In
essence, this view provides the physical implementation of the file system, including
the LUNs allocated to it.
Application Sub-Level of the Application Storage Dashboard 267

Available/Reclaimable Storage
The reports in this menu group provide the data for realizing your ROI—Return on
Investment. By identifying underutilized storage, an enterprise can optimize existing
storage resources and possibly defer purchases.
Array Utilization Dashboard

Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Array Utilization
Dashboard
This report provides array utilization statistics for Hitachi, EMC Symmetrix, and
NetApp storage arrays.
In the LUN Capacity by Category chart, the bars represent the following:
• Primary - The LUN capacity for the primary array.
• Copy - The LUN capacity for a copy stored on the primary array.
• Replication - The LUN capacity for a replication of the data on an external storage array.
Click on the bars in this chart to launch the Array Utilization Summary.
In the Array Utilization bar chart, the bars link to the Array Utilization Summary,
displaying the capacity usage that corresponds to the chart’s legend colors.
In the Array Utilization Summary table, the # Groups links to the List Array Groups
report, from which you can access Array Group Details.

For details about the Chargeback Policy Capacity table, see Chargeback Policy
Capacity.
Array Utilization Summary

Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Array Utilization
Summary
This report can be used to identify the percentage of raw storage that has been allocated
to RAID groups and, more importantly, the percentage of raw capacity that is available.
Additional details can be accessed via the following drill-down links in the report:
• Storage Array or VFiler - NetApp Storage System Detail
• # Groups - List Array Groups
• # LUNs - LUN Utilization Summary
Reports.
Available/Reclaimable Storage 269

Storage Array The name of the array.
Raw: Capacity The amount of raw capacity on the array.
Raw: Allocated Size The amount of raw capacity that has been allocated.
Raw: Available Size The amount of raw capacity that is available to be allocated.
Raw: % Available The percentage of the total raw capacity that is available.
The number of RAID groups for this array drills down to the
RAID: # Groups
List Array Groups report.
RAID: Capacity The amount of capacity in the RAID groups.
RAID: Virtual system, derived from daisy-chained external storage (back-
Capacity end systems). This is array group capacity that does not have
RAID: Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks
Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the
RAID: Used
storage array.
RAID: Available Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
The number of LUNs that have been created on the array.
LUNS: # LUNs Click on the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN
Utilization Summary Report.
LUNS: Total Capacity The total capacity for the LUNs.
LUNS: Alloc Capacity The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs.
LUNS: # Unallocated The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated.
LUNS: UnAlloc Amount of unallocated LUN capacity.

Capacity

Allocated but Unused LUNs
Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Allocated but Unused
LUNs
These are LUNs that have been assigned to a host, but the host has not been placed into
a volume group, or a partition has not been created. The array has created the LUN and
the storage path exists, making the host and host port information available to Capacity
Manager. However, the host storage details—disks, partitions, and volume groups—are
not available for the host associated with the storage path.
Note: The list of Allocated, but unused LUNs will always include the Allocated but
Undiscovered LUNs, along with the additional LUNs that may not have been discovered.
• Array Group - Array Group Details
• Array Name - Array Capacity and Utilization
• Host - Host Utilization Detail
Reports.
Name Name of the LUN that has been allocated, but unused
The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type is Disk,
RAID Type
there is no RAID protection.

Array Group The group to which the array belongs.
Storage Array The storage array for this LUN
Capacity The total capacity (used and unused) of the LUN
Estimated Used LUN estimated used
Estimated Available Estimated available LUN storage
Mount Point Used The amount of storage used by each mount point
Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated
Host LUN The host LUN

The host’s file system mount point for this LUN. It is possible
to have zero mount points and file systems, in the scenario
Mount Point where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the host has
not yet made use of it by creating a file system and mounting
it.
The host’s file system or drive name to which the LUN maps.
File System
The logical collection or volume group to which the volume
Volume Group
belongs
The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs
Host Storage Domain
LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled
with this capability. A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name
for multi-hosted storage capability.
Array Port WWN Array port world wide name

Allocated but Undiscovered LUNs
Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Allocated but
Undiscovered LUNs
Often referred to as orphaned LUNs, these are LUNs that have been assigned to a host,
but they have not been discovered and therefore are not seen on the host side. The array
has created the LUN and the storage path exists, but there is no access to host port and
host information, such as disks, partitions, and volume groups. To make these LUNs
visible to the host, a system administrator must execute a LUN scan or, for older OS and
volume manager versions, re-boot the system. Otherwise, this storage is not available
for mounting file systems. The LUN scan tells the HBA (host bus adapter) that a LUN
has been zoned to the host.
For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary.
Reports.

Unallocated LUNs
Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Unallocated LUNs
These are simply LUNs that have not been allocated to any hosts. The array has created the
LUNs, but there are no storage paths.
For descriptions of the displayed fields, see LUN Utilization Summary.
Reports.

Suspected De-provisioned Hosts
Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Suspected De-
provisioned Hosts
Sometimes LUNs have been assigned to a host, but later, that host is re-assigned or de-
provisioned. Often when hosts are retired, their storage is not given back to the pool and
that storage remains unused.
Capacity Manager identifies suspected de-provisioned hosts by determining data
staleness—that is, finding hosts for which data has not been collected within the
specified time period. The default period is 14 days, however, you can choose from 3
days to a year for the report’s time period. Hosts in this list deserve further investigation
to determine if they truly have been de-provisioned.
Reports.

Unused Partitions/Logical Volumes
Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Unused Partitions/
Logical Volumes
This report lists all hosts with logical volumes that have no mounted file systems. A
logical volume may have been created in the volume group, but the logical volume is
not being used by the host. These unused volumes provide available storage.
Reports.

Unused Disks/Volume Groups
Capacity Manager > Available or Reclaimable Storage> Unused Disks/Volume
Groups
Use this report to view a list of hosts that have available space. These hosts have space
from which more partitions or logical volumes can be created. This report can be used
to identify storage that has been requested, but that is not being used. Then, the list can
be emailed to the group that has requested the storage.
Note: In this report, if the RAID type = 1, the capacity is divided by 2, to reflect true usable
capacity.
• Host Name - Host Utilization Detail
Reports.
Host Name Host that has been identified as having available space
Disk Vol Grp The volume group that has been identified
Type Type of Disk/Volume Group
Capacity Capacity of the host
Used Used capacity
Available Capacity available for this host
RAID Type The RAID type of the volume group

Capacity Chargeback and Billing
Capacity Chargeback Policies are configured by the StorageConsole Administrator. The
administrator uses these policies to assign a cost-per-GB to hosts in a server group.
Capacity Chargeback By Host

Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Chargeback By Host
Refer to the Application Administrator’s Guide for details on configuring a Capacity
Chargeback Policy.
Host Host name links to the Host Utilization Detail
Policy Links the capacity chargeback policy details

The cost per unit, as defined by the capacity chargeback
Unit Cost
policy.
Total capacity that will be charged for this host; links to
Total Usage
Chargeback Detail
Total Cost Usage * Unit Cost = Total Cost

Reports.
Chargeback Detail
Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Chargeback By Host
Then, click on Total Usage.
Host Host name links to the Host Utilization Detail
Policy Links the capacity chargeback policy details
Array Links to the Array Capacity & Utilization.
LUN Links to the LUN Utilization Summary

The cost per unit, as defined by the capacity chargeback
Unit Cost
policy.
Total Usage Amount of storage used for this host.
Total Cost Usage * Unit Cost = Total Cost
Capacity Chargeback and Billing 279

Chargeback Policy Capacity
Capacity Manager > Chargeback and Billing > Chargeback Policy Capacity
This report lists the capacity details, per Capacity Chargeback Policy.
Refer to Application Administrator’s Guide for details on configuring a Capacity
Chargeback Policy.
The name of the capacity chargeback policy links to the policy

Policy
details.
Unit Cost The cost per unit that will be charged
RAID: Total Capacity Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
system, derived from daisy-chained external storage (back-
RAID: Virtual Capacity
end systems). This is array group capacity that does not have
RAID: Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks
Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the
RAID: Used
storage array
RAID: Available Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
LUNs: Total Total LUN capacity for the policy

LUNs: Allocated Allocated LUN capacity for the policy
LUNs: UnAllocated Unallocated LUN capacity for the policy
HDP: Capacity Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning capacity
HDP: Used Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning capacity in use
HDP: Available Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning capacity that is available

Reports.
Policy Detail
The Policy Detail report is available from the Chargeback Policy Capacity report. It
simply provides a list of the policy details.
Displays the Policy Type, such as Array Family, Array Type,

Item Type Array Name, Drive Speed, Drive Type, Drive Capacity, RAID
Type, Is Local, Is HDP, Is DAS, or Domain.
Item Value The value associated with the Policy/Item type.
Capacity Chargeback and Billing 281

LUNs At Risk
Pro-actively increase LUN capacity and avoid outages or performance issues associated
with insufficient capacity.
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > LUNs At Risk
When you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical.
Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical LUNs—that is, those
that are at risk of breaching the critical threshold and running out of space.
Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that LUNs at risk are determined by
evaluating current and projected usage.
The specific logical unit number that is at risk of running out

Name of room. Click on this link to access details in the LUN
Utilization Summary.
The date that the LUN is projected to exceed its threshold and
Risk Date (Projected)
will no longer be considered over-provisioned.
Usage (Projected) Usage based on the period that you’ve selected.
The projected high-water mark represents the maximum
High-Water Mark
usage, based on the history for the report’s selected period.
(Projected)
Note that this size may represent temporary usage.
Array The group to which this LUN belongs.
Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN.
Raw File System The explicit full directory path for the file system.

The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs
Host Storage Domain LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also coupled
with this capability.
Host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for its multi-hosted
storage capability.
iGroup The iGroup associated with the LUN
The logical collection or volume group to which the volume
Volume Group
belongs.
Current Usage The amount of storage already committed.
Host Name Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail.

A LUN is determined to be at risk when this tolerance
threshold is crossed. The default thresholds are set at: Low =
30%; Warning = 70%; Critical = 90%. To modify thresholds
for a particular LUN, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin
Threshold
> Threshold Policies
For additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold
Policy” in the Application Administrator’s Guide.

Reports.
LUNs At Risk 283

Over-Provisioned LUNs
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned LUNs
If you’ve over-provisioned LUNs, you really want to know. Over-provisioning leads to
increased costs unless you reclaim the space.
When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be
displayed. Typically, you’ll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this
report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the
threshold.
Name The LUN number/ID.

As of This date indicates when the LUN became over-provisioned.
High-Water The projected high-water mark represents the maximum usage, based on the
Mark history for the report’s selected period. Note that this size may represent
(Projected) temporary usage.
Host Name Click on a host name to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
Current Amount of storage currently used.
Usage
Available Capacity - Current Usage
Array The array to which the LUN belongs.
Mount Point Location of the file system.
Raw File Explicit disk location of the LUN.
System

Host Storage The name of the host storage domain, a logical group of LUNs that can be
Domain accessed by multiple hosts through the same physical storage port, with each
host accessing its unique LUN. For security purposes, LUN masking is also
coupled with this capability.
A host storage domain is Hitachi’s name for multi-hosted storage capability.
iGroup The iGroup associated with the LUN
Volume The logical collection or volume group to which the volume belongs.
Group
Threshold A LUN is determined to be at risk when this tolerance threshold is crossed.
The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30%; Warning = 70%; Critical =
90%. To modify thresholds for a particular LUN, go to the Portal’s Admin
toolbar: Admin > Threshold Policies
For additional details, see “Adding/Editing a Threshold Policy” in the

Application Administrator’s Guide.

Reports.
Over-Provisioned LUNs 285

Hosts at Risk
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Hosts At Risk
When you generate this report, select a capacity threshold: Low, Warning, or Critical.
Typically, for at risk reports, you will want to view the Critical hosts—that is, those that
are at risk of breaching the critical threshold.
This report lists only the hosts that require your immediate attention. Use the host link
to drill down to particulars.
Note: When reviewing the values in this report, note that hosts at risk are determined by
evaluating current and projected usage.
Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization

Host Name
Detail.
The date that the host is projected to exceed its threshold and
Risk Date (Projected)
will no longer be considered over-provisioned.
Usage (Projected) Projected usage associated with the risk date.
High-Water Mark The high-water mark represents the maximum usage for a
(Projected) period. Note that this size may represent temporary usage
Capacity The host’s storage limit.

Current Usage Storage already consumed.
A host becomes at risk when this tolerance threshold is
crossed. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30%;
Warning = 70%; Critical = 90%. To modify thresholds for a
particular host, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin >
Threshold
Threshold Policies


Reports.
Hosts at Risk 287

Over-Provisioned Hosts
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > Over Provisioned Hosts
By determining which hosts are over-provisioned, you can take steps to reclaim the
space before committing resources to acquire additional storage. Over-provisioning
leads to increased costs as a result of under-utilized storage.
When you execute this report, you can select the Threshold for the list that will be
displayed. Typically, you’ll be interested in the Low or Warning thresholds. Since this
report shows over-provisioning, the list will show usage that has not reached the
threshold.
Click on a host name to access details in the Host Utilization

Name
Detail.
As of (Projected) This date indicates when the host became over-provisioned.
Usage (Projected) Projected consumption by the host.
High-Water Mark High-Water Mark = Capacity * Threshold

(Projected)
Capacity The host’s storage limit.
Current Usage Storage already consumed.

A host becomes over-provisioned when the usage is under the
threshold. The default thresholds are set at: Low = 30%;
Warning = 70%; Critical = 90%. To modify thresholds for a
particular host, go to the Portal’s Admin toolbar: Admin >
Threshold
Threshold Policies


Reports.

16
NetApp Capacity Reports

Chapter15
Capacity Manager provides insight into storage users, over-consumption, and under-
utilized storage. The data collected from NetApp storage is displayed in the reports
described in this chapter.
• Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)
• NetApp Storage System Detail
• NetApp LUN Utilization Summary
• NetApp Aggregate Summary
• NetApp Aggregate Detail
• NetApp Plex Details
• NetApp Volume Summary
• NetApp Volume Details
• NetApp NFS Summary
• NetApp CIFS Summary
• QTree Summary
• NetApp Snapshot Summary
• Array iSCSI Port Utilization
• NetApp Disk Summary
• NetApp Aggregates at Risk
• NetApp Volumes at Risk
• Thin Provisioning Overview
For additional Capacity Manager information, see Capacity Manager Reports.
289
Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View)
Because NetApp utilizes a number of unique constructs—such as Aggregates and
Volumes—to organize and access its storage, additional data is available via drilldown
links.
The report is organized into four columns:

1. NetApp Summary
2. Raw Capacity
3. Aggregate/Volume Capacity - Pools of available storage can be found in existing RAID
groups. Even though storage may be 100% allocated at the array level, the RAID group
utilization will reveal the amount of remaining, usable storage.
4. LUN Capacity

NetApp Summary
This section of the report provides a overview of the storage system, with links to rele-
vant components.
VFiler The VFiler name

The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include all
Storage Array supported storage devices. For a list of supported devices, see the
APTARE StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide.
Model The specific model of the NetApp storage.
Status The current status of the storage. Mouse over this status to view details.
The name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This field
Product provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs, hosts per
array, and drives per array.
# FC Ports Number of Fibre Channel ports
# iSCSI Ports Links to Array iSCSI Port Utilization.
# CIFS Share Links to NetApp CIFS Summary.
# NFS Export Links to NetApp NFS Summary.
# Disks Links to NetApp Disk Summary.

The number of hosts that are sharing the capacity.
This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned by this
# Hosts storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried using one or
more host resource policies. If zero, host resources data has not been
collected.
Host Usage Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.
% Used Percentage of the NetApp storage already utilized.

Reports.
Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) 291

Raw Capacity
This column of information summarizes capacity and usage. The percentages, in
particular, capture the essence of your current utilization status.
Total raw capacity of the storage array. This value is the sum of all PDEVs
(including spares—that is, drives that are not allocated to an Aggregate). If
the RAID state of the PDEV is partner or broken, the disk is not included
Capacity
in the raw capacity calculation. You can set the capacity units to be
displayed, either GB or MB, by selecting the Advanced option when you
generate the report.
Total raw capacity of the logical unit numbers (LUNs) in the array that
Allocated Size have been mapped to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as
volumes on the host and dedicated to an application.
Total raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID group.
Available Size The size is displayed in the units you selected with the Advanced option
when you generated the report.
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array that have
not been assigned to a host and that are available for provisioning. This
% Available
percentage is a better capacity indicator than the number shown as
Available Size.
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity that has been assigned to a host
Raw Usage
and that is not available for provisioning.
Aggregate/Volume Capacity
This column provides an overview of the aggregate (not for VFilers) and volume (for
VFilers) capacity and utilization.
# Aggregates Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary.
Aggr Capacity The aggregate’s total size
Aggr Used Amount of the aggregate’s capacity that is in use
Aggr Available Available storage in the aggregate

Used data storage at the physical layer
Aggr Usage
Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available.
The number of volumes defined for this NetApp unit
# Total Volumes
Links to the NetApp Volume Summary.
The number of thin provisioned volumes; Includes volumes
# Thin Prov Vols
where the Space Guarantee value equals “file” or “none.”
Volume Capacity Total capacity for all associated volumes
Volume Used Total of used space for all the associated volumes
Volume Available Available capacity from all of the associated volumes

Used data storage at the logical layer
Volume Usage
Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the % available.

LUN Capacity
The LUN fields enable drill-down access to additional details so that you can determine
the capacity of each configured LUN.
The number of LUNs that have been created on the array. Click on
# LUNs
the Used link or the LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary.
Total LUN Capacity Total storage capacity for all of the associated LUNs
The number of LUNs on the array that have been mapped to a host.
These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the host and
# Allocated LUNs dedicated to an application. For NetApp, these are the LUNs
associated with an iGroup. Click on the Allocated LUNs link or the
LUN link to go to the LUN Utilization Summary.
AllocLUN Capacity The total storage capacity for the allocated LUNs
# UnAllocated LUNs The number of LUNs that have yet to be allocated

UnAllocated LUN The available LUN capacity
Capacity
LUN Usage % of LUN capacity that is currently in use
Note: The Capacity and Used columns are aggregated and then converted to the units selected
in the Advanced option of the report from which the Host Utilization Detail was launched. Note
that in the conversion to the displayed units, the totals may appear to be slightly inaccurate. This
is due to the division or multiplication by 1024.
Array Capacity and Utilization (NetApp View) 293

NetApp Storage System Detail
Then, click the Array Name link.
Current Configuration
Name Name of the NetApp storage
IP Address IP address of the storage unit
ONTAP Version Version of the NetApp ONTAP operating system
Domain Name The DNS domain name

Auth Type Indicates the type of authentication: ad - Active Directory, nt4 -
Windows NT4, workgroup - Workgroup, passwd - Password file, NIS,
or LDAP
Security Style NTFS or Multiprotocol
Server Name Server name
Windows Type Windows software version
Last Updated Last time the portal database was updated with data collected from the
NetApp system
Aggregate Utilization
Aggregate The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the
Utilization information that is available in the NetApp Aggregate Summary.
Drill down on the “Top 3 of n Aggregate Utilization” to see additional
aggregates.
• Name
• Usage
• Total Capacity
• Allocated Size
• Available Size
Volume Utilization
Volume The thermometers and capacity information provide a sub-set of the
Utilization information that is available in the NetApp Volume Summary.
Drill down on the “Top 3 of n Volume Utilization” to see additional
volumes.
• Name
• Usage
• Total Capacity
• Allocated Size
• Available Size
Capacity Usage Bar Charts

Capacity Usage A cascade of bar charts represents usage by:
Bar Charts
• Array - Displays total capacity, the amount used by system overhead,
and spare capacity.
• Aggregate - Of the total capacity, what is used by the aggregate
• Volume - Volume usage, including specific snapshot details
• LUN/Shares/QTrees
NetApp Storage System Detail 295

Aggregate & Volume Capabilities
Root Volume The name of the current root volume of the NetApp storage array
Disk Types Disks supported by this NetApp array. Possible values include 512 (if
all disks are 512 bps), 520 (if all disks are 520 bps), mixed (if disks are a
mix of 512 and 520 bps), none (if no disks are 512 or 520 bps).
Checksum Types Possible values: zoned (fixed VBN), block (block appended), or mixed
Default RAID Possible values include raid0, raid4, raid_dp.
Types
Snapshot Max Maximum number of snapshots available per aggregate
Allowed RAID List of allowed RAID types
Types

NetApp LUN Utilization Summary
This NetApp-specific report can be accessed via a LUN link in NetApp-specific reports,
such as the NetApp Volume Summary report. A similar report is available for all
storage arrays in your environment. See LUN Utilization Summary.
Using the LUN Utilization Summary, you can view all the mapping details, such as
mount points and file systems.
Name The name of the LUN.

Raid Type The RAID level on the LUN. When the RAID type indicates
Disk, there is no RAID protection.
Aggregate Links to the NetApp Aggregate Summary.
Volume Links to the NetApp Volume Summary.
QTree Name of the QTree to which this LUN belongs. Links to the
QTree Summary.
Storage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail.
Estimated Used LUN estimated used. See Estimated LUN Usage/Availability.
NetApp LUN Utilization Summary 297

Estimated Available Amount of LUN estimated to be available
Mount Point Used The amount of storage used by each mount point. These
values are displayed when a LUN is expanded to view mount
point details.
Host The name of the host to which the LUN was allocated. Click
on a host link to launch the Host Utilization Detail.
Host LUN The LUN associated with the host.
Mount Point The host’s file system mount point for this LUN.
It’s possible to have zero mount points and file systems, in the
scenario where a LUN has been allocated to the host, but the
host has not yet made use of it by creating a file system and
mounting it.
File System The host’s file system or drive name to which the LUN maps.
Volume Group The logical collection or volume group to which the volume
belongs.
iGroup Initiator Group name for NetApp storage; a LUN is mapped to
an iGroup; that is, a method of LUN masking.
Array Port WWN The unique identifier, World Wide Name, of the array port
address.
iSCSI Interface The iGroup contains an iSCSI qualified name that maps to a
LUN. (NetApp only)
Space Reserved Indicates if LUN space reservation is enabled

NetApp Aggregate Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Aggregate
Summary
or
Then, click # Aggregates.
View this report for an overview of how your aggregates are configured to manage
disks, RAID groups, and plexes. The Aggregate Utilization Summary displays one row
for each aggregate, with links to Volume and Plex details.
Note: If the aggregate is mirrored, two Plexes will be listed.
Aggregate The Aggregate number/ID

Storage Array The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associated
Usage Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % available
Total Capacity The aggregate’s total capacity
Allocated Size Amount of capacity that has been allocated for use
Available Size Remaining capacity available for use
RAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-
parity protection)
# Volumes Links to the NetApp Volume Summary
# of Thin Prov Number of thin provisioned volumes
Vols
List of Plexes Lists 1 or 2 Plexes—2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to
the NetApp Plex Details report.
NetApp Aggregate Summary 299

In addition, the following Disk Type information is displayed:
Raid Status RAID status

Count Number of disks
Total Capacity Total capacity of the disks

Reports.

NetApp Aggregate Detail
Then, click an Aggregate Name link.
The Aggregate Detail forecasts usage, based on historical data. Mouse over the Volume
and Aggregate symbols to view the historical and projected usage.
Aggregate Capacity Usage

At the bottom of the window, the cascade of usage bars illustrates the logical subsets of
the aggregate.
• Mouse over the colored bar segments to view the actual values instead of the percentages.
NetApp Aggregate Detail 301

NetApp Plex Details
Note: The # of Aggregates is not listed for a VFiler, as it is not relevant.
Then, in the Aggregate Utilization Summary, click a Plex link.
This drilldown sequence launches the Plex Details report, which displays a list of
details for each of the disks in the Plex’s disk pool. Use this report to understand how
the RAID groups and disks are organized and configured.
RAID Reconstruction Status:

Name Name of the Plex
Is Reconstructing? Y or N
During RAID reconstruction, as a result of a disk failure,
redundant data is read from other disks to recreate the
blocks from the failed disk.
Reconstruction % If reconstruction is in progress, this value shows the
completion percentage.
Plex Disk Pool Details:

See NetApp Disk Summary for a description of these fields.

NetApp Volume Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume Summary
or
Then, click # Volumes.
Each volume depends on its aggregate for its physical storage. Both Traditional and FlexVol
volumes contain directories and files; they also can contain QTrees and LUNs.
Volume Name of the volume

Links to the NetApp Volume Details.
Storage Array The name of the NetApp physical storage for the volume
Aggr The name of the associated aggregate
Pct Usage Percentage of the aggregate that is in use
Space The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none.
Guarantee Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning.
Type Flex for flexible volumes, Trad for traditional volumes
RAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-parity
protection)
Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the volume’s % available
Total Capacity The volume’s total capacity. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is
displayed.
NetApp Volume Summary 303

Allocated Size Amount of volume space in use. If the volume is offline or restricted, 0 is
displayed.
Available Size Amount of space available on the volume. If the volume is offline or
restricted, 0 is displayed.
# QTrees Links to the QTree Summary.
# LUNs Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.
# Shares The number of CIFS shares using this volume—links to the NetApp CIFS
Summary.
# Exports The number of NFS exports using this volume—links to the NetApp NFS
Summary.
# Snapshots The number of snapshots using this volume. Links to the NetApp
Snapshot Summary.

Reports.

NetApp Volume Details
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Volume Summary
Then, click Volume Name.
NetApp Volume Details 305

Volume Summary Status
See NetApp Volume Summary for a description of these fields.
Quota Status
Status Indicates if quotas are enabled: on or off

Sub-Status Minor quota status for the volume, valid only when the status is either
resizing or initializing. The sub-status could be: scanning, etc scanning,
setup, queue scan, done, or none.
Reason If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the last quota
error message.
Quota Errors If blank, there were no errors. Otherwise, this field displays the collection
of quota errors, including the reason code.
Snapshot Schedule Details
This section displays the volume’s current snapshot schedule.
Days Number of daily snapshots taken

Hours Number of hourly snapshots taken
Minutes Number of snapshots taken each minute
Weeks Number of weekly snapshots taken
Which Hours A list of hours when the hourly snapshots are taken
Which Minutes A list of minutes when the by-minutes snapshots are taken
Quota Details
Quota Type User, group, or tree

Quota Target Name, number, or path name, relevant to the quota type
Tree Name of the QTree for this quota
Disk Used Current amount of disk space; “-” indicates unlimited
Hard Disk Limit The amount of disk space reserved for the target; “-” indicates
unlimited.
Soft Disk Limit Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target
exceeds this limit; “-” indicates unlimited.
Threshold When the target exceeds this amount of disk space, a message is logged
File Used Current number of files used by the quota target
Hard File Limit Number of files allowed for the target

Soft File Limit Both an SNMP trap and a log message are generated when the target
exceeds this limit; “-” indicates unlimited.
Quota User Name Name of the User, Group, or SID (Windows security ID)
NetApp Volume Details 307

NetApp NFS Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp NFS Summary
or
Then, click a # NFS Exports link.
NetApp volumes that are exported via the NFS protocol are listed in this report. Using
this report, you can identify who is using the NFS shares.
Path Name The pathname of the file

Volume Name of the volume, which links to the NetApp Volume Details.
QTree Name of the associated QTree
Storage Array Link to the NetApp Storage System Detail.
Host Type Host NFS permission type: read-only, read-write, root
Root Host Name The name of the root host
Host IP address or host name of the host to which the file system is exported
Host Mount Point The mount point of the host that is using the volume
Total Capacity Total capacity associated with the path and volume
Used Capacity Amount of capacity that is used by NFS clients
Free Capacity Available capacity for NFS client use

Reports.

NetApp CIFS Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp CIFS Summary
or
Then, click # CIFS Shares.
View the volumes that have been exported to Windows hosts through CIFS (Common
Internet File System) shares. This report displays the usage of each share.
Name Directory name of the share

Mount Point Mount point of the share
Max User The maximum number of simultaneous connections to the share—0
indicates no limit
Is Volume Offline Indicates if the volume is offline—Yes or No
Force Group This group overrides the group of the file’s owner, so if this field is
blank, it defaults to the file owner’s group.
Volume Name of the volume links to the NetApp Volume Summary.
QTree Name of the associated QTree links to the QTree Summary
Storage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail.
Description Description of the share
Host Name Name of the host that is using the volume
Host Mount Point The home directory of the host that is using the volume
Total Capacity Total size of the share
Used Capacity Amount of storage used by the share
Free Capacity Available capacity

Reports.
NetApp CIFS Summary 309

QTree Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp QTree Summary
A QTree is the mechanism used to partition a volume, enabling the management of
storage by project, user, or group. Use this QTree Summary to view the quota
management configurations for the QTrees within a storage system. Then, drill down to
view how each volume is partitioned.
Qtree Name of the QTree, or if the ID is 0, the name of the volume is displayed
Storage Array Name of the associated NetApp storage system
ID ID of the QTree, which is unique within a volume. An ID of 0 indicates
the volume itself.
Oplocks Indicates if CIFS (Common Internet File System) opportunistic locks are
enabled/disabled.
Security Style UNIX, NTFS, or mixed
Status SnapMirror backup status: Normal, Snapvaulted, Snapmirrored, or Read-
only (if a SnapMirror destination)
Volume Name of the volume to which the QTree belongs. Links to the NetApp
Volume Summary.
Aggregate Name of the aggregate to which the QTree belongs.Links to the NetApp
Aggregate Summary.
# of LUNs The number of LUNs mapped to the QTree. To view the specific LUN
information, see the LUN Utilization Summary.
# of Shares The number of CIFS shares using this volume—links to NetApp CIFS
Summary
# of Exports The number of NFS exports using this volume—links to NetApp NFS
Summary

Reports.

NetApp Snapshot Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Snapshot Summary
NetApp snapshots use pointers to reference the blocks where the data is stored, thereby
using a minimal amount of capacity. A snapshot captures a point-in-time image of the
file system data. When the next snapshot is taken, the pointers will reference other
blocks, as the file system data blocks have changed in the interval between snapshots.
Therefore, the access time provides the time reference for the snapshot block usage.
Snapshots provide a read-only source of data for backups to tape.
Name Name of the snapshot schedule

Storage Array Links to the NetApp Storage System Detail
Volume Links to the NetApp Volume Details
Access Time Time the snapshot was created. This value does not change when the
snapshot is accessed.
Total Blocks Number of 1024-byte blocks in this snapshot
Cumulative Number of 1024-byte blocks—cumulative for current and previous snapshots
Blocks
Dependency Lists the applications that depend on this snapshot: snapmirror, snapvault,
dump, vclone, LUNs, or snaplock
Busy Indicates if an application is using the snapshot
Cumulative % The % of blocks used by this snapshot and all recent snapshots
of Used Blocks
Used Blocks Of all the blocks used on the volume, this is the % used by the snapshot
Cumulative % The % of blocks owned by this snapshot and all recent snapshots
of Total Blocks
% of Total The % of all the volume’s blocks that is owned by this snapshot
Blocks

Reports.
NetApp Snapshot Summary 311

Array iSCSI Port Utilization
Then, click a # iSCSI Ports link.
Array Name The NetApp storage system

iSCSI Interface Name of the interface
Target Portal Name Name of the target portal group that coordinates the iSCSI session
with this NetApp system
Target Group Tag Numeric ID of the disk storage target with which the portal group is
associated (TPGT - target portal group tag). iSCSI portal groups that
are associated with target nodes have a target group tag ranging
from 0 to 65535.
Host IP address or host name of the client initiator that is accessing the
storage via the iSCSI port
Host iSCSI Name Identifies the host’s connection to the storage target
Mount Point Mount point path
File System File system path
File System Type File system type
Capacity Total capacity available
Used Amount of capacity in use

NetApp Disk Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > NetApp Disk Summary
Using the Report Designer, you can filter the output of this report using the following
parameter selections:
• Storage Array
• RAID State
• Disk Type
Name The Disk name

Storage Array The name of the NetApp storage system
Aggregate The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp
Aggregate Detail.
Disk Type Disk Type: ATA, EATA, FCAL, LUN, SAS, SATA, SCSI, XATA,
XSAS, or unknown.
Capacity The Disk’s total capacity
Vendor Disk Vendor
Disk Model Disk Model
RAID State RAID state: broken, copy, partner, pending, present, reconstructing,
spare, or zeroing
RAID Type RAID type: pending, parity, dparity, or data
RAID Status Possible status: copying, degraded, foreign, growing, initializing,
invalid, ironing, mirror degraded, mirrored, needs check, noparity,
normal, out-of-date, partial, raid0, raid4, raid_dp, reconstruct,
resyncing, snapmirrored, verifying, unrecoverable
Serial # Disk serial number
RAID Group The RAID group to which the disk belongs
Firmware Revision Disk firmware revision number

Reports.
NetApp Disk Summary 313

NetApp Aggregates at Risk
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > NetApp Aggregates at Risk
For thin provisioning, it’s important to know when host usage is about to exceed the
storage that was promised. The details shown in this aggregate report can help you
understand the current physical capacity status. When an aggregate is at risk—the
amount of used storage in the flexvol approaches the aggregate’s capacity—it can be re-
sized to add physical disk space to the aggregate.
See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.
Note: The Total Capacity value represents the amount of storage that has been committed or
promised to hosts.
When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or
Critical.
Aggregate The Aggregate number/ID link to NetApp Aggregate Detail

Storage Array The NetApp system with which the aggregate is associated, which
drills down to NetApp Storage System Detail
Usage Mouse over the usage thermometer to view the % available
Total Capacity The aggregate’s total capacity
Allocated Capacity Amount of capacity that has been allocated for use
Available Capacity Remaining capacity available for use
RAID Type raid0 (mirrored), raid4 (single disk for parity), or raid_dp (double-
parity protection)
# Volumes at Risk Links to the NetApp Volumes at Risk
# of Hosts at Risk Links to the NetApp Volumes at Risk
List of Plexes Lists 1 or 2 Plexes—2 if SyncMirror is licensed and enabled. Links to
the NetApp Plex Details report.
Risk Date The point at which the aggregate is at risk

Reports.

NetApp Volumes at Risk
Capacity Manager > Capacity At Risk > NetApp Volumes at Risk
When you configure thin provisioning, you enable multiple volumes to access the same
pool of free storage. Since thin provisioning “commits” more storage to hosts than is
actually available, it is important to identify the remaining, usable storage and the point
at which the aggregate is at risk of not having available storage.
See also, Thin Provisioning Overview.
When you generate this report, you can select the threshold to report: Low, Warning, or
Critical.
Volume Volume name link to NetApp Volume Details

Storage Array The name of the NetApp storage system, which links to NetApp
Storage System Detail
Aggregate The name of the associated aggregate, with a link to the NetApp
Aggregate Detail.
Aggregate Risk The date at which the aggregate is expected to not have storage
Date available for use
Space Guarantee The type of space that has been committed: volume, file, or none.
Note that file or none indicates thin provisioning.
Usage Mouse over the thermometer to see the % available.
Total Capacity Total capacity of the volume
NetApp Volumes at Risk 315

Allocated Capacity Amount of the volume’s capacity that has been allocated
Available Capacity Amount of the volume’s capacity that is available
Host Name The host that is at risk of consuming more than the space guaranteed to
it.
Host Usage Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the estimated % used by the
host.
Mount Points The host’s mount points that are using the storage
Host Capacity The capacity of the host
Estimate Used Estimated amount of storage used by the host
Estimate Available Estimated storage available for host consumption

Reports.
Thin Provisioning Overview

By using an over-subscription strategy, thin provisioning technology addresses the issue
of inefficient storage utilization. Applications are given physical space from a storage
pool when data is written to the application, avoiding the pre-allocation commitment
required by traditional storage provisioning approaches. In this way, an application can
appear to have more storage than is actually reserved for it. As the application’s data
grows, it can be given more storage from the storage pool, with minimal management
intervention. With thin provisioning, existing capacity can be more efficiently used,
eliminating the need for over-provisioning and often delaying the acquisition of
additional storage.
Often storage is over-promised and then actually dealt out as needed, making it
incumbent upon the Storage Administrator to monitor storage usage so that an
application’s write requests can be fulfilled without failures. StorageConsole provides
the following key NetApp reports to facilitate this monitoring process:
• NetApp Aggregates at Risk
• NetApp Volumes at Risk

17
IBM Arrays - Capacity Reports

Chapter15

• Overview of IBM Array Support
• Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)
• IBM Array Site Summary
• IBM Array Summary
• IBM Array Detail
• IBM Rank Summary
• IBM Extent Pool Summary
• IBM Disk Summary
317
Overview of IBM Array Support
APTARE StorageConsole supports data collection and reporting on the following LSI-
based arrays. The LSI-based arrays include IBM DS/ESS and Sun StorageTek series, as
well as SGI InfiniteStorage and Teradata Storage Systems.
IBM Arrays Sun Arrays LSI

Storage System DS3300 Sun StorageTek 2510 LSI 1532
Express Model 70
Express Model 72
Storage System DS4800 Model 80 Sun StorageTek 6540 LSI 6998
Storage System DS4800 Model 88 Sun StorageTek 6540 LSI 6998
Storage System DS5000 Series Sun StorageTek 6780 LSI 7900

Pre-Requisites for IBM Array Data Collection
For System Administrators, detailed installation pre-requisites are documented in the
Data Collector Installation Guide for Capacity Manager. A subset is included here for
quick reference.
Table 17.1 Capacity Manager Data Collector Access Methods
Storage Array Access Methods and Pre-Requisites

IBM Subsystem • IBM SMCLI—verify that SMCLI is installed on the Data Collector
(3000 & 4000 server.
Series)
• Location of the SMCLI:
UNIX: /opt/SM8/client/
Windows: C:\Program Files\SM8\client\
IBM Enterprise • IBM DSCLI—verify that DSCLI is installed on the Data Collector server.
(6000 & 8000 • Location of the DSCLI:
Series)
UNIX: /opt/ibm/dscli
Windows: C:\Program Files\IBM\dscli
• Locate the profile file, typically in the /profile sub-directory and named
dscli.profile. In this file, un-comment the Output Format property and
set it to XML, as shown in the following example.
# Output format type for ls commands, which can take one of the
following values:
# default: Default output
# xml : XML format
# delim : delimit columns using a character specified by "delim"
# stanza : Horizontal table format
# "format" is equivalent to option "-fmt default|xml|delim|stanza".
format: xml
• A User account with monitor group privileges on the array is required.
Pre-Requisites for IBM Array Data Collection 319

Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Enterprise Array View)
The following illustration represents an example of the view available for IBM
Enterprise Arrays (6K/8K). For a description of the fields displayed, see IBM Array
Detail.
Array Capacity & Utilization (IBM Subsystem Array View)

The following examples shows an IBM Subsystem (3K) array.

IBM Array Site Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Site Summary
Four or eight disk drive modules comprise an Array Site. Then, one or two Array Sites
comprise an Array. An Array is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific
RAID format.
Understanding IBM Enterprise Storage Capacity Calculations

• Capacity values for IBM arrays may appear different from what is reported by the IBM CLI
or IBM Tools, as IBM uses a decimal gigabyte—10^9 bytes, while StorageConsole uses
1024 for a KB when converting to GB.
• For FB open systems hosts, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD IBM zSeries or S/390 systems, an
extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the
following criteria:
• State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable
• Disk Classes: ENT, NL
Array Site The Array Site ID
Storage Array The physical storage system; Drill down to the IBM Array Detail.
Device adapter pair number—the physical I/O enclosure location
If the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the
DA Pair
enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the
enclosure
Capacity The capacity of all disks belonging to the Array Site
Number of disks associated with this Array Site. Links to the IBM
# of Disks
Disk Summary.
IBM Array Site Summary 321

Array Name Links to the IBM Array Summary.
Disk RPM The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000
assigned, unassigned, unavailable, initializing. Indicates if the array
site is assigned to the array. If the state is unavailable, its capacity is
State
not included in the total array capacity calculation, as shown in the
Array Capacity and Utilization report.
Disk Class Enterprise fibre channel drives (ENT) or Nearline ATA drives (NL)

IBM Array Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Summary

following criteria:
• State: Assigned, Unassigned, Unavailable
• RAID Types: 5, 6, 10
The Array ID. An Array (also known as a RAID Array) is an Array

Array
Site that has been formatted to a specific RAID format.
Storage Array The physical storage array system
assigned, unassigned, unavailable
Array State
Indicates if the data is assigned to a Rank.
RAID Type RAID 5, 6, or 10
Drill down to the IBM Array Site Summary for details. An array can
# of Array Sites
have 1 or 2 array sites.
Rank Drill down to the IBM Rank Summary.
IBM Array Summary 323

Device adapter pair number—the physical I/O enclosure location
If the DA Pair is an even number, it indicates the first DA pair in the
DA Pair
enclosure; an odd number indicates the second DA pair in the
enclosure
The capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)—one or
Capacity more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is
the total for all the Array Sites in the array.

IBM Array Detail
This report is accessed via a link from other IBM Array reports.
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Array Summary
Then, click an Array.

IBM Storage System Summary
The Storage Unit ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and

Storage Unit
serial number
The Storage Image ID contains the manufacturer, machine type, and
Storage Image
serial number
Model The storage unit model
State of the storage unit: online, offline, resuming, quiescing, quiesce
State
exception, forced quiescing, fenced, discovery
Product Storage Unit vendor
Number of Fibre Channel ports; links to the Array Port Utilization
# FC Ports
report
# Disks Number of disks for this storage unit
IBM Array Detail 325

Array Site Used Amount of array storage used by the Array Site
Number of hosts mapped to this array
# of Hosts
Links to the Host Capacity & Utilization
Host Usage Amount of capacity used by hosts
Raw Capacity
Total array capacity derived from the physical DDMs (disk drive
Capacity
modules); specifically, the DDM usage in the array site
Amount of capacity that has been allocated is derived from DDM
Allocated Size
usage for array members and spares
Amount of capacity that is free, derived from unassigned and
Available Size
unconfigured DDMs
Raw Capacity Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage
Array Site Capacity

The number of array sites to which this array belongs
# of Array Sites
Links to the IBM Array Site Summary
Sum of the capacity of all the associated array sites, derived from
Array Site Capacity
the capacity of the disks in each array site
Sum of the array site capacity that is in used—that is, “assigned” to
Array Site Used
an array
Array Site storage that has not been allocated—that is,
Array Site Available
“unassigned” to an array
Array Site Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage
Array Capacity
# of Arrays Links to the IBM Array Summary

The capacity of the Array (also known as the RAID Array)—one or
Array Capacity more Array Sites can comprise an array and the capacity shown is
the total for all the Array Sites in the array.
Array Used If an array is assigned to a rank, it is “used”
Array Available Array capacity that is not part of a rank is “available”
Array Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the usage percentage.
Rank Capacity
# of Ranks The number of ranks links to the IBM Rank Summary
Total Capacity Sum of the capacity of all ranks

Used Capacity Capacity assigned to an extent pool
Available Capacity Capacity not assigned to an extent pool

Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the ranks
Rank Usage
that have been allocated.
Extent Pool Capacity

Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary; both FB and CKD are
# of Extent Pools
included in this number.
FB Extent Pool The sum of the capacity of all the fixed block extents in the extent
Capacity pool; For FB, an extent is 1 GB.
The amount of fixed block extent pool storage in assigned to a
FB Extent Pool Used
logical volume
FB Extent Pool The fixed block extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical
Available volume
Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the fixed
FB Extent Pool Usage
block extent pool that is allocated.
CKD Extent Pool The sum of the capacity of all the CKD extents in the extent pool;
Capacity For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
CKD Extent Pool The amount of the CKD extent pool storage assigned to a logical
Used volume
CKD Extent Pool The CKD extent pool storage that is not assigned to a logical
Available volume
CKD Extent Pool Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the CKD
Usage extent pool that is allocated.

Logical Volumes
This section provides the LUN mapping for determining capacity and usage.
# of FB Volumes Links to the LUN Utilization Summary
Total FB Capacity Sum of the capacity of all the fixed block volumes for this array
Links to the LUN Utilization Summary showing a list of allocated
# of Allocated FB
LUNs
FB Allocated Sum of all the fixed block volume capacity that has been allocated
Capacity
# of Unallocated FB The number of unallocated fixed block volumes
FB Unallocated The fixed block capacity that is not in allocated

Capacity
# of CKD Number of CKD volumes
CKD Capacity Sum of the capacity of all the CKD volumes for this array
Top 3 of n Ranks
Click on the link to view the complete list of Ranks.
Name Rank name links to the IBM Rank Summary
Usage Used Extents in the Rank
Total Extents Total Extents in the Rank

Extents in this Rank that are available for allocation in the Extent
Available Pools; If the available amount equals the total amount, it indicates
that the rank is not allocated to any Extent Pools.
Top 3 of n Extent Pools

Click on the link to view the complete list of Extent Pools.
Either 1 or 2 Ranks can comprise an Extent Pool. When it is a 1-to-1 relationship, the
Extent Pool capacity values will look identical to the Rank values. Otherwise, they will
be double the Rank values. All Ranks in an Extent Pool are of the same RAID type.
Name Extent Pool name links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary
Usage Amount of Extent capacity that is in use

Total Extents Total Extent capacity
Available Available Extent capacity
IBM Storage System Capacity Detail

Mouse over the bars to view the capacity totals in GB.
IBM Storage System FB Volumes

A pie chart represents fixed block volumes:
• Ungrouped
• Unmapped
• Mapped
Mouse over the pie segments to view percentages.
Capacity and Object Usage Forecast

Graphs represent forecasted usage for the following objects:
• Array Sites
• Arrays
• Extent Pools
• Ranks

IBM Rank Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Rank Summary
An IBM Rank is logical storage, enabling storage provisioning that is not constrained
by the size of an array. One or more arrays comprise an IBM Rank, forming logically
contiguous storage. Note that IBM often refers to Arrays as RAID Arrays.

following criteria:
• State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned, Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating,
Configuration Error, Deconfiguration Error
• RAID Types: 5, 6, 10
• Storage Types: fb, ckd
Rank The name of the group of arrays
Storage System The physical storage system on which the rank resides

The Configuration State: Normal, Configuring, Unassigned,
Reserved, Deconfiguring, Depopulating, Configuration Error,
State Deconfiguration Error
A rank remains in an unassigned state until it is assigned to an
Extent Pool.
Normal - If no other data state issues, it is Normal. Note that an
unassigned array will have a Normal data state
Degraded - A disk drive module in the array may be rebuilding.
Read Only - Possible issues: one or more disk drive modules have
failed; there aren’t enough spares available for rebuilding; data loss
Data State could occur if writes continue without redundancy.
Failed - Possible causes: Two or more disk drive modules have
failed; disk drive modules aren’t available for rebuilding data.
Repairing - Array repair could be accepted, but not yet complete
Inaccessible - The storage image can’t access all the data on the
array.
The Rank Group is either 0 or 1, corresponding to the Extent Pool
Group
ID.
Raid Type RAID 5, 6, or 10
Storage Type Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD)

The rank’s total capacity; the capacity is derived from the number
Total Capacity
of extents
Used Capacity Amount of storage used by the rank
Available Capacity Amount of the Rank storage that is available for use
Total Extents The total number of Extents, striped across the disks in the array
Used Extents The number of partitions/extents that are in use.
Available Extents The number of extents available for use

The arrays that comprise the Rank. An Array (also known as a
Array RAID Array) is an Array Site that has been formatted to a specific
RAID format.
1 or more Array Sites comprise an Array, from which the Rank is
# of Array Sites
configured
Extent Pool Name Links to the IBM Extent Pool Summary
IBM Rank Summary 331

IBM Extent Pool Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Extent Pool Summary

following criteria:
• Storage Types: fb, ckd
• Rank Status: below, exceeded, full
Name Extent Pool name

The physical storage system (storage array) on which the extent pool
Storage System
resides
A rank can only be assigned to one extent pool, but more than one
Rank Group
rank can reside in an extent pool.
Fixed block (FB) or Count-Key-Data (CKD)
Storage Type
For FB, an extent is 1 GB. For CKD, an extent is 1 cylinder (.92 GB).
Rank Status:
below - % of available extents is less than threshold
Status
exceeded - % of available extents is greater than threshold
full - 0 extents are available
Total Capacity Sum of the capacity of all extents in this pool
The amount of space in this extent pool that is currently available;
Available Capacity this value is derived from the total capacity minus the allocated
capacity
Available Extents The number of extents that are available to the logical volume

The number of extents that are in reserved (this space must be
Reserved Extents
explicitly released before the logical volume can use it)
The number of logical volumes that have been configured from this
# of Volumes
extent pool; this is the storage that can be given to a host
# of Ranks The number of ranks in this extent pool—1 or 2
IBM Extent Pool Summary 333

IBM Disk Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > IBM Disk Summary
• In the Report Designer, you can narrow the report output by selecting values for the
following criteria:
• Disk State: Normal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing, Certifying,
Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate, Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred
• Disk Usage: unassigned, unconfigured, spare required, spare not required, array member
ID Disk ID
Storage Array The physical storage array system

The array site ID links to the IBM Array Site Summary. If a disk is
Array Site
not in an array site, it is available for other use.
Model The disk model identifier

How this disk is currently being used: unassigned, unconfigured,
Disk Usage
spare required, spare not required, array member

Disk Interface FCAL, SATA, SAS
Disk RPM The disk revolutions per minute, such as 10000 or 15000
Disk Rate The minimum disk interface rate for the disks in the array site
Normal, New, Installing, Verifying, Formatting, Initializing,
State Certifying, Rebuilding, PFSed, Inter failed, Inappropriate,
Removed, Failed, Failed - Deferred
Capacity The disk’s capacity
IBM Disk Summary 335

18
HDS Dynamic Provisioning Reports

Chapter17

• Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary
• Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Utilization
• Hitachi Disk Summary
• Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View)
337
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi DP Pool Summary
The Dynamic Provisioning Pool uses virtual volumes for data storage, with actual
capacity available upon request to a host writing to LUN storage. Use this report to
ensure that your pool always has sufficient free capacity, enabling on-demand
provisioning to hosts.
Pool ID The name of the Dynamic Provisioning Pool
Storage Array The storage array on which the pool resides

Mouse over the thermometer to view the percentage of the pool that
is used. Used capacity is the total capacity of all the pages that have
Used
data written to them; that is, consumed or touched storage. The
percentage is the used size divided by the total physical capacity.
This is the total size of all DP pool volumes that have been created
Capacity
within the pool.
Allocated This is storage that can be written to by a host.
This is consumed or touched capacity; that is, the sum of the 42 MB
Consumed
pages assigned from the pool that have data written to them.
Capacity - Used Size = Available Size. Monitor this space to ensure
Available Size that you do not deplete the available space in a pool, ensuring that
host requests for storage are not denied
Threshold1 is a user definable threshold used to monitor consumed
Threshold1
DP pool capacity.
Threshold2 This threshold is hard-coded in the firmware of the array.

The number of VOLs in this DP Pool; links to the LUN Utilization
Number of DP Pool
Summary to view the LDEVs that have been allocated to the DP
VOLs
Pool.
The number of virtual volumes in this Dynamic Provisioning pool;
Number of DP VOLs links to the LUN Utilization Summary. This is capacity that is
available to be allocated to hosts; associated capacity.
This is the capacity of all DP Volumes that have been allocated to
hosts. It also includes overhead for dynamic provisioning. This
Capacity of DP VOLs capacity could be over-subscribed, which means that the capacity
shown here could exceed the capacity shown in the Capacity
column.
Status Reported by Device Manager: Normal, Blocked, Over Threshold
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Summary 339

Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Utilization
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi DP Pool Utilization
This dashboard provides an at-a-glance view of dynamically provisioned storage,
enabling insight into potential exposure, as well as, storage that may be reclaimable.
Pool ID The name of the Dynamic Provisioning Pool
Array The storage array on which the pool resides

Of the DP Vols that have been created in the pool, Associated
storage represents potential promised capacity; that is, the amount
Associated
of storage that can be given to a host. The Associated Warning line
defaults to 170%.
The green bar in the chart indicates exposure; this is storage that
can be written to by a host. When the green bar crosses the Capacity
Allocated line, there is potential that hosts may attempt to write to storage that
is not physically available. The Allocated Warning line defaults to
70%.
Unallocated Unallocated = Capacity - Allocated storage
This is Consumed, or touched capacity; that is, the sum of the 42
MB pages assigned from the pool that have data written to them.
Consumed could be greater than Allocated, in cases where de-
Consumed
provisioned hosts have not had storage reclaimed. Consumed can
never exceed capacity, but as it nears capacity, this chart provides
an indication of a potential issue.

This is the total physical size of all DP pool volumes that have been
created within the pool. When Allocated (green bar) crosses this
Capacity line, there may not be storage available for future writes. Note that
the Threshold 1 line represents a % of capacity that is user-defined.
If not customized, Threshold 1 defaults to 70%.
This is a user-definable threshold to monitor pool usage. If not
Threshold1
customized by the user, the default value is 70%.
Reclaimable Storage
There are times when storage is not in use, yet it’s difficult to make that determination.
For example, a host can be de-provisioned and therefore the storage is un-masked, but
data remains on the disk. These pages could be freed up and storage reclaimed. In the
Hitachi DP Pool Utilization report, storage may be reclaimable when the Consumed
value is greater than the Allocated value.
Hitachi Dynamic Provisioning Pool Utilization 341

Hitachi Disk Summary
Capacity Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Hitachi Disk Summary
Device Name The name of the disk

The storage array in which the disk is located; links to the Array
Storage Array
Capacity & Utilization report
The group to which the disk belongs; links to the Array Group
Group Name
Details report
Capacity Capacity of the disk
Vendor Vendor of the disk
Serial # Serial number of the disk
Model Disk model
Firmware Version The disk’s firmware version
RPM Disk revolutions per minute
Disk Type FC, SATA, BD, SAS, or Unknown
Chassis # The chassis number

unknown, data, unallocated, offline, outofservice, spare,
Role
spareunitialized, n/a

Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View)
The Array Capacity and Utilization report provides an overview of storage array
capacity and utilization. Use this report to identify storage arrays that are underutilized
or highly utilized.
The Array Capacity & Utilization report represents Hitachi Arrays and Hitachi
Dynamic Provisioning (HDP) in the following manner:
The name that you assigned to the array. Available values include
all supported storage devices. From here you can drill down to the
Storage Array
array. For a list of supported devices, see the APTARE
StorageConsole Certified Configurations Guide.
The family classification of the storage array as assigned by the
Family vendor. Use this name to ascertain the vendor’s product
specifications.
Type The specific model of the storage array.
Vendor The name of the vendor that distributes the storage array.
The name of the product, typically shown as a series number. This
Product field provides an indicator of capacity specifications, such as LUNs,
hosts per array, and drives per array.
The number of ports in the array. Click on this link to view the
# Ports
Array Port Utilization.
# Disks The number of disks in the array.
Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View) 343
This is the total number of unique hosts that have LUNs assigned
by this storage array, and the hosts have been successfully queried
# Hosts using one or more host resource policies. If zero, host resources
data has not been collected. Click on the Hosts link to go to the Host
Capacity & Utilization report.
Host Usage Links to the LUN Utilization Summary report.
% Used The percentage of the storage that is currently used.

For HDS arrays: Sum of capacity of all PDEVs from all array
groups. Capacity Manager assumes that all PDEVs are part of an
Capacity array group, so PDEVs that are marked as “not included in an array
group” (-1) are included in the capacity calculation. That is, no
disks are treated as spares.
Total raw capacity of the LUNs in the array that have been mapped
to a host. These LUNs are typically configured as volumes on the
Allocated Size
host and dedicated to an application.Unallocated storage is storage
that is not part of an Array Group.
Total raw capacity of the array that has not been carved into a RAID
Available Size group. The size is displayed in the units you selected with the
Advanced option when you generated the report.
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array
that have not been assigned to a host and that are available for
% Available
provisioning. This percentage is a better capacity indicator than the
number shown as Available Size.
Expressed as a percentage, total capacity of the LUNs in the array
Raw Usage that have been assigned to a host and that are not available for
provisioning.
The number of array groups in the storage array. Links to List Array
# RAID Groups
Groups.
RAID Groups Total capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
Capacity
Local Capacity All the capacity from the attached disks
Applicable to HDS arrays only - Capacity from a back-end system,
Logical Virtual derived from daisy-chained external storage (back-end systems).
Capacity This is array group capacity that does not have PDEVs in the
storage array.
Total used capacity of the array groups (by LUNs) in the storage
RAID Groups Used
array.
RAID Groups Available capacity of the array groups in the storage array.
Available
RAID Group Usage Thermometer with mouse-over that displays the percentage used
The number of dynamic provisioning pools links to the Dynamic
# Pools
Provisioning Pool Summary

Capacity The Dynamic Provisioning capacity for this array
Used Amount of the dynamically provisioned capacity in use
Free Amount of the dynamically provisioned capacity that is available
DP Usage Mouse over this thermometer to view the usage.
# LUNs Number of LUNs present in the storage array
Total LUN Capacity Sum of the capacity of all LUNS for the storage array
# Open Allocated The number of open LUNs (volumes) that have set paths.
LUNs
Open Alloc LUN Represents the capacity of the open LUNs (volumes) that have set
Capacity paths.
# Open Unallocated The number of open LUNs that do not have set paths.
LUNs
Open Unalloc LUN The capacity of the open LUNs that do not have set paths.
Capacity
These are reserved LUNs that cannot be assigned to hosts; for
# Open Reserved
example, dynamic pool capacity. No paths can be set for these
LUNs
LUNs.
This is the capacity of the reserved LUNs that cannot be assigned to
Open Resv LUN
hosts; for example, dynamic pool capacity. No paths can be set for
Capacity
these LUNs.
LUN Usage The percentage of the LUN that is allocated.
Array Capacity & Utilization (Hitachi Arrays & HDP View) 345
19
logicalAPTARE StorageConsole Release Notes, v6.5
Virtualization Manager Reports

Chapter17
APTARE StorageConsole provides insight into Virtual Machine performance and the
capacity utilization of mapped datastores. Virtualization Manager offers reports on
storage resource utilization at the file system and virtual disk levels for each VM. In
additional, forecasting reports predict future storage capacity needs in virtualized
environments.
The data collected on Virtual Machine storage is displayed in the reports described in
this chapter. Using these reports, you can identify unused, reclaimable storage.
• Virtualization Terminology
• Overview of Virtualization Manager
• VM Server Summary
• VM Server Detail
• VM Summary
• VM Detail
• VM Files Summary
• Datastore Utilization
• Datastore Detail
• Datastore Usage Breakdown
• Physical Disk Utilization
• Physical Disk Detail
• VM Performance Summary
• VM Performance Over Time
• Datastore Performance Summary
• Physical Disk Performance Summary
• Physical Disk Performance Over Time
• VM Size Forecast
• Datastore Capacity Forecast
347
Virtualization Terminology
The following terms are defined in the context of APTARE StorageConsole
Virtualization Manager.
Note: The usage of VM refers to a Virtual Machine, not Virtualization Manager.
The capacity of all the datastores hosting a Virtual Machine File

Capacity: Datastore System (VMFS) or, for NAS storage, a Network File System
(NFS).
Also known as the Virtual Disks or Volume, this is the capacity of
Capacity: Logical the virtual machine, derived from the virtual machine’s VMDK
file(s).
The datastore is the container for the VMs and their configuration
files, Virtual Disks, and other files, such as the ISO files that are
used for installing a virtual machine. A datastore provides the vir-
Datastore tual storage resources via mapping to physical storage on DAS
SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The datastore is the
storage provisioning source for one or more VMs on one or more
hosts.
The physical server (bare metal box) that is hosting the VMs via
the virtualization software, such as ESX. Virtual machines reside
VM Server
on a VM Server, sometimes referred to as a Virtual Host or Vir-
tual Machine Server.
A VM can use either a virtual disk or it can access the host
machine’s physical disk drive: Raw Device Mapping or Raw Disk
Physical (Raw) Disk
Map (RDM) file. Raw disk mapping to a LUN may have been
chosen in order to optimize performance.
Also known as a Virtual Hard Drive or Virtual Machine Images
(.VMDK file), this is the storage that is available to a guest oper-
ating system. It appears as a physical disk to the guest operating
Virtual Disks system, but it actually is a file that encapsulates the OS, applica-
tions, and data files of the VM. The VMDK file is accessed as if it
were a physical hard disk. VMDK files can be either on the host
or stored remotely.
Also known as a VM Instance; the logical server running on a
VM Server.
VM Guest
Note: All host names within a domain must be unique, especially
when VM cloning occurs.
Virtual Host See VM Server.
The container for the guest operating system and applications;
Virtual Machine
each VM is separate from all other VMs, even though they may
(VM)
share physical resources, such as memory and storage devices.

VM Server is used throughout the reports to represent the physi-
cal server that is hosting the Virtual Machines‚ for example, the
VM Server
physical server running ESX.
See VM Server or Virtual Host.
See Virtual Disks. Note that for Raw Mapping (RDM), the
VMDK
VMDK file simply contains the metadata to map to a LUN.
The Virtual Machine File System, with a hierarchical directory,
provides the structure for managing access to shared, clustered
VMFS storage. Each VM has a single subdirectory in the VMFS volume
for the VMDK files (virtual disks). For raw disk mapping, the
VMFS is mounted on the Virtual Machine.
The Volume is the storage that is exposed to the OS (filesystems
mounted it on it). A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and
D:\, as seen by the guest OS. These logical disks can be:
• Virtual Disks, which are VMDK files that contain the actual
Volume data that is part of a datastore.
• Raw Mapping, which is a small VMDK file that contains the
metadata that maps to a LUN.
Note: Volume Usage shown in StorageConsole reports represents
logical disk usage.
Virtualization Terminology 349

Overview of Virtualization Manager
Using APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager, you can optimize storage
allocation to virtual systems to improve efficiency and reduce costs. Virtualization
Manager complements your virtual management console, with reports that can help you
determine if storage resources are over- or under-utilized and if applications running in
the virtual environment are contributing to storage access bottlenecks. With
Virtualization Manager, you can easily view the virtual-to-physical relationships to
understand what virtual systems are consuming physical storage, and more importantly,
how much of that storage is consumed by out-dated, unnecessary snapshot files.
For additional details, see Virtualization Terminology.
Understanding the Datastore

Since APTARE StorageConsole Virtualization Manager maps the VMs to the actual
physical storage, it is important to understand the Datastore. The Datastore is the
container for the VMs and their configuration files, VM disks, and other files, such as
the ISO files that are used for installing a virtual machine. A Datastore can be located
on DAS SCSI, FC SAN arrays, iSCSI, or NAS drives. The Datastore is the storage
provisioning source for one or more VMs, on one or more hosts, mapping to one or
more physical storage devices.

All of the objects managed by VMware vCenter comprise the VM inventory: hosts,
clusters, VMs, and Networks.
Characteristics of a Datastore
• Configured as a clustered file system
• Configured per host, but multiple hosts can point to the same datastore
• Managed at the host level and the data center level
• Datastore path format:
[<datastore>] <path>
where <datastore> is the datastore name and <path> is a slash-delimited path from the root
of the datastore.
Example: [storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx
Using Virtualization Manager for Planning and Monitoring

Using Virtualization Manager, you have the tools to effectively plan the deployment of
virtual machines in your enterprise and then follow through with monitoring storage
allocation and usage. In concert with Capacity Manager and Backup Manager, you have
the ability to monitor all aspects of your storage environment and you can ensure that
your data is sufficiently protected.
Virtualization Manager offers the following solutions:
Virtual Environment Administration Reports for Planning & Monitoring

• Determine optimal deployment of • VM Size Forecast
Virtual Machines
• Identify storage access bottlenecks • VM Server Summary
• VM Performance Summary
• Reclaim space • VM Summary - Choose a Datastore and drill
• Identify VM files that are taking up down to the details to determine file system
storage, but are not in the VM Inventory allocations.
• VM Files Summary
Overview of Virtualization Manager 351

VM Server Summary
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Server Summary
Use this report to view the list of Virtual Machine Servers, with drilldown access to
reports that provide details to help you determine what is using the space on a datastore.
View Virtualization Manager Scope Selection for the report scope options.
The VM Server Summary lists the VM Servers within your selected scope; that is, the
physical servers that are hosting the VMs.
When running this report, the following mutually exclusive scope selections are
available:
• Server Group
• Datastore
Note: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights
(for example, Status or Hardware Health) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.
Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for example,
Name
the ESX host
IP Address IP address of the VM Server
State VM connection state: Connected, Not Responding, Disconnected, None

Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert,
Status
definite problem. When filtering the report on this field, use the color.
Indicates the overall health of the host’s hardware: None, Unknown,
Hardware Health Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert. When filtering the report
on this field, use the color.
# CPUs Total number of processors in the virtual machine
Avg CPU Usage The host’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number of
Last 24 Hrs samples taken within that timeframe
Total Memory Total memory capacity of the VM Server.
Avg Mem Usage The VM Server’s average memory usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the
Last 24 Hrs number of samples taken within that timeframe

The number of disks that the VM Server can access‚ either internal
disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization. Note that
# Disks the disks are specific to the VM server, whereas the Datastore utilization
may be using both VM Server disks and disks apart from the VM Server
disks.
Amount of disk space that is unallocated. Mouse over this thermometer
Unallocated to view the total, unallocated, and percentage unallocated. Click on this
thermometer to view the Physical Disk Utilization.
The number of datastores provisioned to the VM Server; drill down to
# Datastores
the Datastore Utilization report
Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the total datastore capacity, the
Datastore Usage amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Datastore
Capacity Forecast.
A VM is active when it is powered on. An inactive VM is in the
# Active VMs inventory, but is powered off. This column shows the number of active
VMs. Drill down to the VM Summary.
The total number of VMs in the inventory, both active and inactive.
# Total VMs
Drill down to the VM Summary.
VM Server Summary 353

VM Server Detail
This report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Server Summary report.
Note: VMTools must be installed to enable collection of the IP address, Host name, mount
points, and guest operating system of the VM.
VM and VM Disk Size Example

In the VM Server Detail shown above, the VM size is greater than the VM Disk size.
• VM Size = the sum of all files for this VM (including snapshot files), indicating the amount
of storage that the VM is actually using
• VM Disk Size = the amount of space that was presented to the Guest OS when the VM was
created and configured
Given these definitions, your task would be to determine what is taking up all the
storage for this VM. Often, a number of stale, unneeded snapshot files can be removed
to free up space.
• Click on the VM Name to view the VM Detail with the list of snapshots and VM Files.
• View the VM Files list, where the file path identifies the directory where the data is stored.
• From a Datastore perspective, view the Datastore Utilization and drill down to the Datastore
Detail to identify the physical disks associated with a VM’s storage utilization.

Summary Data
Name of the VM Server that is hosting the virtual server; for
Name
example, the ESX host
Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is
Host Name
installed; links to Server Details
IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if
IP Address
VMTools is installed
Network adapter connection state: Connected, Not Responding,
State
Disconnected, None
Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning,
Status
Red=Alert, a definite problem
Indicates the overall health of the host’s hardware: None, Unknown,
Hardware Health
Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning, Red=Alert
System Vendor Host vendor
System Model Model of the host system
VM Server Detail 355

Total Memory Total memory available as a resource to the VMs on this host
Total CPU Total CPU available as a resource to the VMs on this host
CPU Vendor Processor’s vendor
CPU Description Type of processor
CPU Speed Processor speed
# HBAs/Ports Number of host bus adapters and ports on the VM Server
# NICs Number of physical network interface cards
NIC Speed Speed of the interface cards
# Total VMs Number of VMs configured on this host and in the inventory
A VM is active when it is in the inventory and powered on; it is
# Active VMs
inactive if it is in the inventory, but powered off.
# Datastores Number of datastores that this VM Server is using
Datastore Usage Amount of storage in the datastore that this VM Server is using
The number of disks that the VM Server can access‚ either internal
# Disks
disks or LUNs. Drill down to the Physical Disk Utilization.
Mouse over the thermometer bar to view the total disk capacity, the
Unallocated Disk amount used, and the % of the total used. Drill down to the Physical
Disk Utilization.
Version Version of the virtual server software, such as ESX
Last Updated Timestamp of last data collection
Performance & Forecast

Average and Maximum usage graphed over time‚ for the number of
CPU
samples taken within that timeframe
Average and Maximum usage graphed over time‚ for the number of
Memory
samples taken within that timeframe
Largest VMs
Click the link to access the full list of the largest VMs, listed in descending order, with
the top storage-consuming VMs at the top of the list.
For a description of these fields, see VM Summary.
Datastores
For a description of the fields in this table, see Datastore Utilization.

Disks
These are the physical disks that are available to the VM Server.
For a description of the fields in this table, see Physical Disk Utilization.
VM Summary
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Summary
Use this report to find the largest Virtual Machines.
Note: When using Advanced Filtering for Tabular Reports to filter rows by the Indicator Lights
(for example, Connection, Power, or Status) use the color: Red, Yellow, Green, or Gray.
VM Summary 357
VM Name Name of the Virtual Machine
VM Server The server that is hosting the VM
Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools
IP Address
is installed
State: Connection None, Connected, or Suspended
State: Power Powered Off, Powered On

This is essentially an alarm indicator that reflects the condition of the
Status resources: Gray=Status Unknown, Green=Normal, Yellow=Warning,
Red=Alert, definite problem
Avg CPU Usage The host’s average CPU usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number
Last 24 Hours of samples taken within that timeframe
Avg Memory Usage The host’s average Memory usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the
Last 24 Hrs number of samples taken within that timeframe
Size of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files,
Size: VM and snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM.
See VM and VM Disk Size Example.
This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the
Size: VM Disk Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM.
See VM and VM Disk Size Example.
This is the disk usage inside of the VM (for example, C:\, D:\)
A Volume maps to logical disks, such as C:\ and D:\, as seen by the
Volume Usage
guest OS; usage for the past 24 hours‚ for the number of samples
taken within that timeframe. For inactive VMs, the usage is unknown.
Datastore Usage Datastores used by this VM

VM Detail
This report can be accessed via the Name link in the VM Summary report.
VM Detail 359
Summary Data
Name Name of the virtual machine
Host Name Hostname of the guest; value is displayed only if VMTools is installed
IP address of the Virtual Machine; value is displayed only if VMTools is
IP Address
installed
VM Server Links to the VM Server Detail report
VM Size Amount of storage the VM takes up

Indicates if the VMware tools have been installed for the guest operating
VMware Tools
system
Version of the VMware tools that are running on the guest operating
Tools Version
system
Connection None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended
State
Power State None, Powered Off, Powered On, or Suspended
Status
definite problem
Boot Time The VM’s power-on time
Suspend Time The time when the VM was put in a suspended state
The datastore to which the VM belongs
Datastore
Links to the Datastore Detail report
Resource Pool The resource pool (compartment) to which the VM belongs
Last Update The last time the VM configuration was updated

Date
Current Path and name of the current snapshot
Snapshot
The file path in datastore format, for example:
VM Path Name
[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx
System OS Guest operating system running on the VM
Notes The annotation field of the VM
Performance & Forecast

Note: The default StorageConsole polling interval is set to every 5 hours, however, this can be
customized.
CPU The CPU average and maximum usage to date.
Memory The Memory average and maximum usage to date.

VM Size Over Time
Displays the average and maximum VM storage usage to date.
Volumes
This table lists the local disks seen by the virtual machine, such as C:\, D:\.
For a description of the fields in this table, see Logical Disk Utilization.
Disks
This table provides the details for the physical disks in the VM.
Disk Label The label of the physical disk

RDISK = raw, physical disk; Capacity will be N/A for RDISKs
Disk Type
VDISK = virtual disk
Capacity The storage potential of the virtual disk
Datastore The datastore to which the virtual disk belongs
LUN The LUN on which the virtual disk’s storage is located
Array Array in which the disk resides

1 = Persistent - immediate, permanent changes
2 = Non-persistent - changes do not persist once VM is powered off
Mode
3 = Undoable - user determines how and when changes are saved
4 = Append - changes appended to a log when VM is powered off
Snapshots
A tree structure represents the Snapshots for this VM.
Example:
VM Detail 361
VM Files
For a description of the fields in this table, see VM Files Summary.
Logical Disk Utilization

Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Summary
Then, click on the Volume Usage thermometer.
Disk Path The path to the logical disk
VM Name Virtual machine name
Total Capacity Total amount of storage allocated to the VM
Used Amount of the VM’s allocated storage that is in use
Free Amount of the VM’s allocated storage that is available for use
Usage A thermometer represents the percentage of disk usage

VM Files Summary
Virtualization Manager > Administration Reports > VM Files Summary
This report lists all VM files. Use this report to identify space that could be reclaimed.
File Name Name of the file
File Path The file path in datastore format; for example:

[storage] win2k/testing/bue11dtesting.vmx
Datastore The datastore in which this file resides
VM Server The host that is running the VM software (ESX)
VM Name Name of the virtual machine
VM Host Name The server that is hosting the VMs

VM Status
definite problem
VM Files Summary 363

File type identifier
VmLog - log for VMware workstation activity (.log)
VmNvram - VM BIOS state (.nvrm)
File Type
VmDisk - contents of the VM’s hard drive (.vmdk)
VmSnapshot - metadata about snapshots (.vmsd)
VmConfigFile - primary configuration file (.vmx)
File Size Size of the file
Last Modified Date and time stamp of last file modification

Datastore Utilization
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore Utilization
The Datastore Utilization Summary gives you the ability to identify what storage is in
use and where it is located. Click on the Datastore link to view the Datastore Detail
where you can view the Extents and then link to the corresponding Physical Disk
Detail. In addition, the Datastore Detail provides a link to the array from which the
storage has been provisioned.
Datastore Utilization 365

Name The name of the Datastore links to Datastore Detail.
Total Capacity Total capacity of the datastore

Used Total amount of the datastore that is in use‚ both VM usage and other files
Free Amount of the datastore that currently is unused and potentially available
Usage Mouse over the thermometer to view the % of the total capacity used.
Size of the virtual machine, which includes VMDK files, log files, and
Total VM
snapshots; the sum of all the files taking up storage by this VM.
Used
This value links to the VM Files Summary, which lists the usage details.
The sum of all virtual disks‚ VMDK (.vmdk files), that are occupying space.
This sum does not include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated
VMDK Used snapshot data may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may
exceed VM Disk Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM
was created.
VM Disk This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the Guest
Capacity OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM.
Indicates VMs that are not currently in the inventory, but are taking up
VM Not In
space in the Datastore. These are VMs that are not visible in VMware
Inventory
vCenter. Click this link to view the VM Files Summary.
# Sharing VM The number of hosts configured to access this datastore.
Servers
# VMs Number of virtual machines stored on this datastore
The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32
# Extents
physical storage extents).
# Disks The number of disks used by this datastore (up to 32 physical disks)
The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage
# Arrays
Links to Array Capacity and Utilization.

Datastore Detail
This report can be accessed from the Datastore Utilization report.
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore Utilization
Then, click on a Datastore name.
Name Name of the datastore
Type Datastore type: a specific NFS file system or NAS

This field is related to Datastore type and will be populated only when the
Server
type is NAS.
The VM folder in which this Datastore is located. This field is related to
Folder
Datastore type and will be populated only when the type is NAS.
Multiple Host Indicates if this datastore can be shared by multiple hosts: Yes or No
Access
Last Updated Timestamp of the last write access
This number links to the VM Summary report, listing the VMs associated
# VMs
with this Datastore.
The number of extents that were added to expand the datastore (up to 32
# Extents
physical storage extents).
# Disks The number of physical disks associated with the datastore
The number of arrays from which this datastore gets physical storage links
# Arrays
to Array Capacity & Utilization.
The sum of all virtual disks‚ VMDK (.vmdk files). This sum does not
include .snapshot metadata files, however, other outdated snapshot data
VMDK Used
may be in .vmdk files. For this reason, VMDK Used may exceed VM Disk
Capacity, the amount that was configured when the VM was created.
Total VM Used Amount of the Datastore used by VMs
Total Capacity Total capacity of this Datastore
Datastore Detail 367

Free Capacity Available capacity in this Datastore
Used Capacity Amount of this Datastore’s capacity already in use
Capacity Usage Mouse over this thermometer to view the usage percentage
This is the amount of storage that was configured and presented to the
VM Disk
Guest OS when the virtual disk was originally created for the VM. When
Capacity
you connect to a VM client, this capacity appears as hard disks.
Indicates VMs that are not currently in the inventory, but are taking up
VM Not In
space in the Datastore. These are VMs that are not visible in VMware
Inventory
vCenter. Click this link to view the VM Files Summary.
Datastore Capacity & Forecast
Extents

Name of the storage device in the following 4-part format:
<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>
EXAMPLE: vmhba1:1:3:1
Name If vmhba appears in the name, it indicates a specific physical HBA on the
ESX server.
If the fourth segment is not included in the name, it indicates that the
datastore has consumed the whole disk/LUN.
Type VMFS or NFS
Mode physical, logical
Capacity Capacity of this particular extent
Disk The disk on which the extent resides

If there is a LUN mapping, a link to the corresponding array accesses the
Array
Array Capacity and Utilization report.
Shared VM Servers
For a description of the fields in this table, see VM Server Summary.
VM Utilization
For a description of these fields, see VM Summary.
Datastore Detail 369

Datastore Usage Breakdown
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Datastore Usage
Breakdown
Use this report to view a graphical representation of the file types comprising each
datastore. See the Overview of Virtualization Manager for a diagram and description of
the types of files that are maintained in a Datastore.

Physical Disk Utilization
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk
Utilization
Use this report to view what disk space has been allocated to datastores.
The raw device mapping path, in the format:

Name
‘vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>’
VM Server Name of the VM Server
Disk Type SCSI device type, such as disk
Vendor Device manufacturer

The array on which the disk resides; links to the Array Capacity &
Array
Utilization report
The LUN path, in the format
LUN ‘<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>’
Links to the LUN Utilization Summary
Operational State The device’s state of health
Total Capacity Total capacity of the disk
Physical Disk Utilization 371

Allocated Capacity The amount of the disk that has been allocated
# Datastores The number of datastores that are using the disk
# Extents The number of extents associated with the disk

Physical Disk Detail
Virtualization Manager > Storage Capacity & Utilization > Physical Disk
Utilization
Then, click on a Name link.
The raw device mapping path, in the format:

Name
vmhba<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>
VM Server Name of the VM Server
State Operational state of the disk, such as ok and degraded
Model Model of the disk
Vendor Device manufacturer
SCSI Level The device’s SCSI level, an indicator of clock and bus speeds
Last Updated Last date and time of data collection
Disk Type SCSI device type, such as disk
Total Capacity Capacity of this disk
Physical Disk Detail 373

The LUN path, in the format:
<HBA>:<SCSI target>:<SCSI LUN>:<disk partition>
LUN
Links to the LUN Utilization Summary.
Name of the array in which the disk is located; links to the Array
Array Capacity & Utilization report to view the array from with the LUN
was provisioned.
# FC Targets Number of Fibre Channel targets‚ paths to the array from the host
# iSCSI Targets The number of paths to the iSCSI array from the host
iSCSI Target Name The actual target name from the array’s perspective
iSCSI Node Name The actual node name from the array’s perspective
Array Node WWN Storage array node World Wide Name
Array Port WWN Storage array port’s World Wide Name
HBA Node WWN Host bus adapter node World Wide Name
HBA Port WWN Host bus adapter port World Wide Name

VM Performance Summary
Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > VM Performance Summary
When a VM exhibits performance issues, it could stem from either the server, the actual
storage, or other network factors. Once server bottlenecks are addressed, the next step is
to determine if there’s an issue with the LUN and disks. While vCenter provides
performance statistics, this information is not always readily available to Storage
Administrators.
The VM Performance Summary enables a Storage Administrator to have an at-a-glance
look at I/O performance statistics: CPU, Memory, and Disk I/O. In addition, Disk I/O is
broken out into reads and writes, with latency statistics.
Focusing on Specific I/O Statistics

To isolate a particular set of statistics—for example, Disk I/O—use the Advanced
options in the Report Designer and click the relevant checkbox.
VM Performance Summary 375

All values represent the average for the interval selected in the “Group By” option.
The name of the VM. Click on this link to view VM Server Details, if it
Name
is a host, or VM Detail, if it is a VM.
Type Type of partition: host server or VM
CPU Pct The VM’s CPU usage percentage
CPU Max Pct Maximum CPU usage percentage for the report’s Group By interval
CPU MHz Average processor speed for the report’s Group By interval
CPU Max MHz Maximum processor speed for the report’s Group By interval
Memory Pct Average memory usage percentage for the report’s Group By interval
Memory Max Pct Maximum memory percentage for the report’s Group By interval

Memory MB Average memory usage for the report’s Group By interval
Memory Max MB Maximum memory usage for the report’s Group By interval
Disk I/O Data Xfer Disk I/O average transfer rate for all disks for the VM
(KB/sec)
Disk I/O Latency Disk I/O wait time, which is the average for the report’s Group By
(ms) interval
Disk Read Data Disk read transfer rate, average for the report’s Group By interval
Xfer (KB/sec)
Disk Read # Reads Average number of disk reads for the report’s Group By interval
Disk Read Latency Disk read wait time, which is the average for the report’s Group By
(ms) interval
Disk Write Data Disk write transfer rate for the report’s Group By interval
Xfer (KB/sec)
Disk Write # Writes Average number of disk writes for the report’s Group By interval
Disk Write Latency Disk write wait time, which is the average for the report’s Group By
(ms) interval
Show Chart Check the boxes for which you want to generate charts.
VM Performance Summary 377

VM Performance Over Time
Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > VM Performance Over Time

Datastore Performance Summary
Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > Datastore Performance
Summary
Datastore Name Datastore name links to Datastore Detail
Disk Name Disk name links to the Physical Disk Detail
VM Server VM Server links to the VM Server Detail
Disk I/O Data Xfer Disk I/O average for all disks
(KB/sec)
(ms) interval
Disk Read Data Disk read transfer rate, average for the report’s Group By interval
Xfer (KB/sec)
(ms) interval
Disk Write Data Disk write transfer rate for the report’s Group By interval
Xfer (KB/sec)
Datastore Performance Summary 379

(ms) interval
Show Chart Check the boxes for which you want to generate charts.

Physical Disk Performance Summary
Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > Physical Disk Performance
Summary
Physical Disk Name Disk name links to the Physical Disk Detail
VM Server VM Server links to the VM Server Detail
# Datastore Number links to the Datastore Utilization Summary
Disk I/O Avg Usage Disk I/O average for all disks
(ms) interval
Disk Read Speed Disk read speed, average for the report’s Group By interval
(MB/sec)
(ms) interval
Disk Write Speed Disk write speed for the report’s Group By interval
(MB/sec)
(ms) interval
Show Chart Check the boxes for which you want to generate charts
Physical Disk Performance Summary 381

Physical Disk Performance Over Time
Virtualization Manager > Performance Reports > Physical Disk Performance Over
Time

VM Size Forecast
Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > VM Size Forecast
This VM report projects the growth of the VM over time, based on historical data.
The VM name links to the VM Server Detail.
VM Size Forecast 383

Datastore Capacity Forecast
Virtualization Manager > Forecast & Planning > Datastore Capacity Forecast
The Datastore name links to the Datastore Detail.

Index
A content pane, 2 J
applications job
at risk, 263 D detail, 121
over-provisioned, 264 dashboard duration, 126
storage dashboard, 265 command center, 144 notes, 124
array creating, 56 queue, 135
capacity, 238, 290 data protection, 146 running, 135
capacity forecasting, 260 media forecasting, 200 status summary, 113
group details, 255 operations, 142 summary by server, 134
port utilization, 258 storage pools, 157 summary report, 115
data protection, 146 volume summary, 125
B deleting reports, 37
backup designing reports, 14 L
duration report, 126 disk log
bar chart usage & performance, 181 error, 128
example, 91 drive login/logout, 10
billing performance, 187, 189 LUN
chargeback report, 278 utilization, 187 at risk, 282
usage policy, 212 duration over-provisioned, 284
backup/restore, 126 utilization, 251
C
capacity E M
at risk, 282 emailing reports, 45 media
planning, 199 error availability
capacity reports consecutive, 130 forecasting, 203
array capacity, 238, 290 error log consumption forecast, 204
array forecast, 260 summary, 128 current summary, 164
array group, 255 export reports, 40 forecasting
array port, 258 dashboard, 200
chargeback, 278 F tape detail, 166
host detail, 245 failed jobs, 54 tape summary, 165
host forecast, 261 forecasting, 199 usage details, 205
host utilization, 243 array capacity, 260 menus, 3
hosts at risk, 286 host capacity, 261 message of the day, 147
LUN utilization, 251 media, 200 mission control, 152
LUNs at risk, 282 media availability, 203 monthly summary, 133
over-provisioned media consumption, 204
hosts, 288 scratch pool, 207 N
over-provisioning, 284 tape drive usage, 206 navigation
changing report, 1
password, 12 H NetApp reports, 290
reports, 35 home page, 60 note
chargeback, 278 host adding to job, 121
client at risk, 286 notes, 124
consecutive errors, 130 capacity forecasting, 261
NetWorker instance, 227 over-provisioned, 288 O
protection summary, 155 utilization detail, 245 operations dashboard, 142
columns, 34 utilization summary, 243 over-provisioning, 284
command center, 144 hosts, 288
Index 385
LUN, 284 scratch pool, 207
search
P report, 1, 37
password, 12 servers, 22
policy server
backup details, 220 consumption
billing & chargeback, 212 summary, 217
NetBackup, 219 details, 148
NetWorker, 224 groups, 151
TSM domain details, 223 search, 22
TSM domains, 222 service level
profile, user, 11 backup start time, 173
protection sharing reports, 53
client, 155 SLA
backup duration, 177
Q backup start time, 173
queue backup status, 175
job summary, 135 sorting, 34
SQL query, 73
storage pools, 157
R
storage unit
real time status, 197
summary, 196
refresh reports, 34
report template designer
formatting, 88 T
SQL Query, 73 tape drive
reports forecasting usage, 206
changing, 35 scratch pool, 207
custom, 61 usage, 206
deleting, 37 time zone, 120
designing, 14 TSM
emailing, 45 database utilization, 193
exporting reports, 40 storage pools, 157
finding, 1
forecast, 199 U
generating, 30 utilization
instances, 18 chargeback, 278
job summary, 115 largest volume, 132
parameters, 24 TSM database, 193
refresh, 34
saving, 36 V
scheduling, 40 volume
scope, 19, 20 largest, 132
searching, 37 summary, 125
sharing, 53 utilization, 132
templates, 18
viewing, 49
restore
duration report, 126
S
saving reports, 36
scheduling reports, 40
scope, 19, 20

APTARE Storage Console UserGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

APTARE Storage Console UserGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

APTARE StorageConsole

Report User’s Guide

Publication Change Record

Copyrights and Trademarks 3

4 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

6 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

8 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

10 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Thank you for purchasing APTARE® StorageConsole.

About This Book

Who Should Use This Book

About This Book i

Typographical Conventions iii

Technical Support: Sales:

Getting Acquainted With Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:

About the Portal User Interface

Navigation Pane (Report Navigator)

About the Portal User Interface 1

2 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Tool Item User Admin Documented in:

About the Portal User Interface 3

4 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Tables and Charts

System Status and Backup Manager Reports

6 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Capacity Manager Reports

Virtualization Manager Reports

8 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Replication Manager Reports

Replication Manager Reports Description

Browser Mac Windows Unix Linux

To log in to the Portal:

1. Do one of the following from your browser:

Click on Logout in the upper right-hand corner of the Portal toolbar.

10 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

To update your profile:

1. In the Portal’s toolbar, choose Tools > Change Password.

12 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Generating and Maintaining Reports

This chapter covers the following topics:

14 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

About the Report Designer 15

16 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

About the Report Designer 17

Report Template and Report Instance

Units of Measure in Reports

18 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

About Report Scope 19

1. In the Navigation pane, select a report to generate. For example:

3. Do one of the following:

20 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Listing Server Groups

2. You can drill down to details for the following information:

Listing Server Groups 21

22 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

Searching for Servers 23

Backup Manager Primary Settings

• Time Period • Event Type

Table 2.1 Backup Manager Primary Settings

24 APTARE StorageConsole Report User’s Guide

The type of jobs you are interested in:

The Media Status parameter is included in the Tape Media Summary